ROOF AND HVAC REPLACEMENT CENTRAL STORES - Stockton Stores Bid Spec_2… · STOCKTON, CA 95202 2130 21 ST STREET SACRAMENTO, CA 95818 JOB #16065 NOVEMBER 26, 2018 . ... MP0.1 MECHANICAL

ROOF AND HVAC REPLACEMENT

CENTRAL STORES – BUILDING A

and FUEL SHACK

MUNICIPAL SERVICE CENTER

STOCKTON CORPORATE YARD

1465 SOUTH LINCOLN STREET

STOCKTON, CA 95206

PROJECT MANUAL

BID SET

Project: PW1320-A

CITY OF STOCKTON

PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT

22 E. WEBER AVENUE, ROOM 301

STOCKTON, CA 95202

2130 21ST STREET

SACRAMENTO, CA 95818

JOB #16065

NOVEMBER 26, 2018

12/31/17

-A

ROOF AND HVAC REPLACEMENT – PW1320

MUNICIPAL SERVICE CENTER


CITY OF STOCKTON LIST OF DRAWINGS

PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT DOCUMENT 00 01 15

PAGE 1 of 1

DOCUMENT 00 01 15

LIST OF DRAWINGS

DRAWINGS – CENTRAL STORES BUILDING AND FUEL SHACK

SHEET NUMBER SHEET DESCRIPTION

A0 TITLE SHEET

AS1 OVERALL SITE PLAN

AD1 DEMOLITION ROOF PLAN

A1.0 ROOF PLAN

A2.0 DETAILS

A2.1 DETAILS

A3.0 T-24 SHEET

S1 STANDARD DETAILS

S2 ROOF FRAMING PLAN

MP0.1 MECHANICAL PLUMBING LEGENDS, NOTES, AND SCHEDULES

MP1.1 MECHANICAL PLUMBING DEMOLITION ROOF PLAN

MP2.1 MECHANICAL PLUMBING NEW ROOF PLAN

MP3.1 MECHANICAL PLUMBING DETAILS

T24 TITLE 24

E0.1 ABBREV., SYMBOLS, & DETAILS

ED0.2 ROOF PLAN – DEMO ELECTRICAL

E1.0 FIRST FLOOR PLAN – ELECTRICAL

E1.1 ROOF PLAN – NEW ELECTRICAL

E2.0 SCHEDULES & ONE LINE

E5.1 DETAILS

TOTAL SHEETS = 20

END OF DOCUMENT

PW1320-A

ROOF AND HVAC REPLACEMENT – PW1320 MUNICIPAL SERVICE CENTER


CITY OF STOCKTON TABLE OF CONTENTS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT DOCUMENT 00 01 10 PAGE 1 of 3

DOCUMENT 00 01 10

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Architect/Engineer Signature Sheet Notice Inviting Bids Notice to Contractors Instructions to Bidders Bid Forms State Wage Rates General Requirements Division 1 Section Title 01 11 00 Summary of Work Price and Payment Procedures Division 1 Section Title 01 25 13 Product Substitution Procedures 01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures 01 29 00 Payment Procedures Administrative Requirements Division 1 Section Title 01 31 19 Project Meetings 01 32 13 Scheduling of Work 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 01 35 13.23 Special Project Procedures for Site Standards Quality Requirements Division 1 Section Title 01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements 01 42 13 Abbreviations and Acronyms 01 42 16 Definitions 01 42 19 Reference Standards 01 43 41 Material and Equipment Qualifications 01 45 00 Quality Control Temporary Facilities and Controls Division 1 Section Title 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 13 Construction Waste Management and Disposal Construction and Demolition (C&D) Debris Waste Reduction

Program Requirements 01 52 13 Field Offices

PW1320-A

ROOF AND HVAC REPLACEMENT – PW1320MUNICIPAL SERVICE CENTER


CITY OF STOCKTON TABLE OF CONTENTSPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT DOCUMENT 00 01 10

PAGE 2 of 3

Product RequirementsDivision 1 Section Title

01 66 00 Product Storage and Handling Requirements

Execution and Closeout RequirementsDivision 1 Section Title

01 73 29 Cutting and Patching01 76 00 Alteration Project Procedures01 77 00 Closeout Procedures01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data01 78 36 Warranties01 78 39 Project Record Documents

Existing ConditionsDivision 2 Section Title

02 41 19 Selective Building DemolitionHazardous Material Reports (Provided by the City of Stockton)

ConcreteDivision 3 Section TitleNot Used

MasonryDivision 04 Section TitleNot Used

MetalsDivision 5 Section Title

05 50 00 Metal Fabrications

Woods, Plastics, and CompositesDivision 6 Section Title

06 10 00 Rough Carpentry

Thermal and Moisture ProtectionDivision 7 Section Title

07 22 00 Roof and Deck Insulation07 54 00 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing07 60 00 Flashing and Sheet Metal07 72 00 Roof Accessories07 92 00 Joint Sealants

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON TABLE OF CONTENTSPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT DOCUMENT 00 01 10

PAGE 3 of 3

OpeningsDivision 8 Section TitleNot Used

FinishesDivision 9 Section Title

09 91 00 Painting

Divisions 10 through 21 – Not Used

PlumbingDivision 22 Section Title

22 05 00 Plumbing and Utilities

HVACDivision 23 Section Title

23 05 00 Mechanical Work – General Requirements23 05 10 Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning

ElectricalDivision 26 Section Title

26 05 03 Equipment Wiring Connections26 05 05 Selective Demolition for Electrical26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems26 27 26 Wiring Devices26 28 16 Enclosed Switches

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON SUMMARY OF WORKPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 01 11 00

PAGE 1 of 5

SECTION 01 11 00

SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS AND PROVISIONS:

All Contract Documents should be reviewed for applicable provisions related to the provisions in this document, including without limitation:

A. General Conditions, including, without limitation, Site Access Conditions and Requirements;

B. Special Conditions.

1.02 SUMMARY OF WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of this Contract may consist of the following:Selective demolition and construction necessary for the replacement of the roofing systems of Building A – Central Stores. Removal and or replacement of specific HVAC package units; demolition and replacement of sheet metal gutters and wood fascia; and the installation of A roof access ladder. Work includes all associated abatement / demolition, architectural, structural, mechanical, plumbing, and electrical work as indicated in the Drawings, Specifications and Hazardous Materials Reports.

B. Order of work:Award of contract, submittals, submittal review, Pre-construction meeting, Notice to Proceed, Working days start within ten (10) days of the Notice to Proceed or when Contractor begins work (whichever occurs sooner).

1.03 CONTRACTS

A. Perform the Work under a single, fixed-price Contract for each building. The sum of the base bids for the base scope of work shall be used to determine the apparent low bid. The acceptance of bid alternates will be provided to the apparent low bidder after determination of responsiveness. Once demolition starts on a building, the building will be continually under construction to completion.

1.04 WORK BY OTHERS

A. Work on the Project that will be performed and completed prior to the start of the Work of this Contract: Not applicable

B. Work on the Project that will be performed by others (Owner’s forces) concurrent with the Work of this Contract: Not applicable.

PW1320-A




PAGE 2 of 5

1.05 CODES, REGULATIONS, AND STANDARDS

A. The codes, regulations, and standards adopted by the city, state, and federal agencies having jurisdiction shall govern minimum requirements for this project. Where codes, regulations, and standards conflict with the Contract Documents, these conflicts shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Owner and the Architect.

B. Codes, regulations, and standards shall be as published effective as of date of bid opening, unless otherwise specified or indicated.

C. Contractor shall be solely responsible for meeting the requirements of all codes, statutes, and laws applicable to the health, safety, and welfare of all personnel on the site during the operations of this contract including all requirements of Cal/OSHA and the Hazardous Materials Report.

1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS:

A. Contractor shall maintain onsite one set of the following record documents; Contractor shall record actual revisions to the Work:1. Contract Drawings2. Specifications3. Addenda4. Request For Information (RFI), Architect’s Supplemental Instructions

(ASI), and other modifications to the Contract.5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples6. Field test records7. Inspection certificates8. Manufacturer's certificates9. Personnel dealing with hazardous materials, records of materials

removed, transportation company handling hazardous materials, information of site / company receiving hazardous materials, and records of all clearances. See also Section 01 78 39: Project Record Documents.

B. Contractor shall store Record Documents separate from documents used for construction. Provide files, racks, and secure storage for Record Documents and samples.

C. Contractor shall record information concurrent with construction progress. Record information is to be verified by the Project Inspector on a regular basis during construction and at a minimum of prior to approval of each application for payment.

D. Specifications: Contractor shall legibly mark and record at each product section of the Specifications the description of the actual product(s) installed, including the following:1. Manufacturer's name, product model, and serial number.2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized.

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON SUMMARY OF WORK PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 01 11 00 PAGE 3 of 5

3. Changes made by Addenda, ASI, and any written directives.

1.07 EXAMINATION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Contractor shall be held to have examined the Project Site and acquainted itself with the conditions of the Site or of the streets or roads approaching the Site.

B. Prior to commencement of Work, Contractor shall survey the Site and existing

buildings and improvements to observe existing damage and defects such as cracks, sags, broken, missing or damaged glazing, other building elements and Site improvements, and other damage.

C. Should Contractor observe cracks, sags, and other damage to and defects of the

Site and adjacent buildings, paving, and other items not indicated in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall immediately report same to the Owner and the Architect. Failure to promptly report existing damage prior to starting work will result in the Contractor assuming responsibility for the repair of same.

1.08 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES

A. The Central Stores Building shall be occupied during construction. Demolition work for this building shall be done over a three day weekend coinciding with a City of Stockton furlough Friday.

B. If the space at the Project Site is not sufficient for Contractor's operations,

storage, office facilities and/or parking, Contractor shall arrange and pay for any additional facilities needed by Contractor.

C. Contractor shall not interfere with use of or access to occupied portions of the

building(s) or adjacent property. D. Contractor shall maintain corridors, stairs, halls, and other exit-ways of building

clear and free of debris and obstructions at all times. E. No one other than those directly involved in the demolition and construction, or

specifically designated by the Owner or the Architect shall be permitted in the areas of work during demolition and construction activities. Contractors shall have an identification badge with the company name and individual’s name at all times while working onsite.

F. The Contractor shall install temporary construction security fence at work site

and lay down yard. The City of Stockton is not responsible for security of Contractor’s construction area or lay down yard.

1.09 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES

A. The Drawings only represent the utility lines and structural installations that are involved in the scope of Work. Many other utility lines and structural components exist and are to be maintained. Contractor shall provide their own survey of

PW1320-A




PAGE 4 of 5

these existing installations before proceeding with work and other operations that could damage same; maintain them in service, where appropriate; and repair damage to them caused by the performance of the Work. The Contractor shall take all precautions necessary to protect the existing utilities within the Project area. Any utilities damaged due to the Contractor's negligence shall be repaired or restored to their original condition at the Contractor's sole expense. Existing utilities shall be kept in service during the life of the Contract unless relocation, reconstruction, abandonment, or outage is specifically authorized by the Architect.

B. Contractor shall be alert to the possibility of the existence of additional structures and utilities. If Contractor encounters additional structures and utilities, Contractor will immediately report to the Owner for disposition of same as indicated in the General Conditions. Any discovered additional structures and utilities are to be recorded on the Record Drawings.

C. Should additional utilities lines or structural components be damaged after the Contractor has performed his survey and after demolition work has been completed, the Contractor shall make immediately repairs and notify the Architect and Owner in writing. The Contractor may, at their option, request reimbursement for these repairs through Section 01 26 00: Contract Modification Procedures.

1.10 UTILITY SHUTDOWNS AND INTERRUPTIONS

A. Contractor shall give the Owner a minimum of five (5) business days written notice in advance of any need to shut off existing utility services or to effect equipment interruptions. The Owner will set exact time and duration for shutdown, and will assist Contractor with shutdown. Work required to re-establish utility services shall be performed by the Contractor.

B. Contractor shall obtain Owner's written approval as indicated in the General Conditions in advance of deliveries of material or equipment or other activities that may conflict with Owner's use of the building(s), site, or adjacent facilities.

1.11 STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY

A. Contractor shall be responsible for and supervise each operation and work that could affect structural integrity of various building elements, both permanent and temporary.

B. Contractor shall include structural connections and fastenings as indicated or required for complete performance of the Work.

PW1320-A




PAGE 5 of 5

1.12 CONFLICT IN CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. In case of conflict or discrepancy between any of the Contract Documents, the order of documents listed below shall be the order of precedence, with the first item listed having the highest precedence.1. Contract 2. Building Codes3. Permits4. Project Special Provisions5. Project Specifications6. Project Plans7. City’s Standard Specifications8. City’s Standard Plans9. Revised Caltrans Standard Specifications10. Caltrans Standard Specifications11. Revised Caltrans Standard Plans12. Caltrans Standard Plans13. Supplemental Project Information

PART 2 – PRODUCTS: Not Used.

PART 3 – EXECUTION: Not Used.

END OF DOCUMENT

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONSPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 01 25 13

PAGE 1 of 3

SECTION 01 25 13

PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS AND PROVISIONS


A. Instructions to Bidders;

B. General Conditions, including, without limitation, Substitutions for Specified Items; and

C. Special Conditions.

1.02 SUBSTITUTIONS OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT:

A. Catalog numbers and specific brands or trade names followed by the designation "or equal" are used in conjunction with material and equipment required by the Specifications to establish the standards of quality, utility, and appearance required. Substitutions which are equal in quality, utility, and appearance to those specified may be reviewed subject to the provisions of the General Conditions.

B. Wherever more than one manufacturer's product is specified, the first-named product is the basis for the design used in the work and the use of alternative-named manufacturers' products or substitutes may require modifications in that design. If such alternatives are proposed by Contractor and are approved by the Owner and/or the Architect, Contractor shall assume all costs required to make necessary revisions and modifications of the design resulting from the substitutions requested by the Contractor.

C. When materials and equipment are specified by first manufacturer's name and product number, second manufacturer's name and "or approved equal," supporting data for the second product, if proposed by Contractor, shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements for substitutions.

D. If the Owner and/or Architect, in reviewing proposed substitute materials and/or equipment, require revisions or corrections to be made to or additional supplemental supporting data to be resubmitted, Contractor shall promptly do so. If any proposed substitution is judged by the Owner and/or Architect to be unacceptable, the specified material or equipment shall be provided.

E. Samples may be required. Tests required by the Owner and/or Architect for the determination of quality and utility shall be made at the expense of Contractor, with acceptance of the test procedure first given by the Owner.

PW1320-A




PAGE 2 of 3

F. In reviewing the supporting data submitted for substitutions, the Owner and/or Architect will use for purposes of comparison all the characteristics of the specified material or equipment as they appear in the manufacturer's published data even though all the characteristics may not have been particularly mentioned in the Contract Documents. If more than two (2) submissions of supporting data are required, the cost of reviewing the additional supporting data shall be borne by Contractor, and the Owner will deduct the costs from the Contract Price.

1.03 SUBSTITUTION PROVISIONS:

A. Cost and Time Considerations: Substitutions will not be considered unless a net reduction in Contract Sum or Contract Time results to Owner's benefit, including redesign costs, life cycle costs, plan check and permit fees, changes in related Work, and overall performance of building systems.

B. Determination of accptance: Architect and Owner’s Representative will determine the acceptability of proposed substitutions, and the Architect will notify all bidders in writing by addendum of acceptance or rejection. The determination by the Architect regarding functional performance and aesthetic quality shall be final.

C. Non-Acceptance: If a proposed substitution is not accepted, Contractor shall immediately include provisions for the specified product in their bid.

D. Substitution Limitation: Only one request for substitution will be considered for each product.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 Procedures: Contractor shall prepare a written request for substitution and submit the request to Architect and the Owner’s Representative for review and recommendation for acceptance. Acceptance and approval of substitutions shall be by the Owner and the Architect and be published through an addendum.

3.02 Substitution requests shall include some or all of the following; appropriate product data, shop drawings, technical charts or reports, test data, and / or installation instructions for the proposed product or system, suitable for use in comparison of characteristics of products.

A. Include a written, point-by-point comparison of characteristics of the proposed substitute product with those of the specified product.

PW1320-A




PAGE 3 of 3

B. Include a detailed description, in written or graphic form as appropriate, indicating all changes or modifications needed to other elements of the Work and to construction that will be necessary if the proposed substitution is accepted.

3.03 All requests for substitution must be received by Owner and Architect a minimum of seven (7) working days prior to the bid date to be considered for acceptance.

END OF DOCUMENT

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURESPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 01 26 00

PAGE 1 of 5

SECTION 01 26 00

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Construction Documents and general provisions of the Agreement Between Owner and Contractor, including Division 00 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing contract modifications.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:1. Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures2. Section 01 29 00 – Payment Procedures3. Section 01 32 13 – Scheduling of Work4. Section 01 33 00 – Submittals5. General and Supplemental Conditions of the Contract for Construction

1.03 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION

A. In the event that the Project Manager or their designated representative, at any tier, determines that some portion of the drawings, specifications, or other contract documents requires clarification or interpretation by the Architect, the General Contractor shall submit a Request for Information (RFI) in electronic format to the Architect and copy the Owner’s Representative and the Project Manager. Requests for Information may only be submitted by the General Contractor and shall only be submitted on the Request for Information Form provided at the end of this section.1. In the Request for Information, the General Contractor shall clearly and

concisely set forth the issue for which clarification or interpretation is sought and why a response is needed from the Architect.

2. In the Request for Information, the General Contractor shall provide their interpretation and a proposed solution supported with drawings, photos, etc. to provide an accurate description of the existing conditions.

3. The Project Manager will review each Request for Information to determine whether they are valid. If it is determined that the question or issue is valid, the General Contractor will forward the document to the Architect for response.

5. A Requests for Information Response shall be issued within five (5) business days of receipt of the request from the General Contractor unless the Owner determines that a longer time is necessary to provide

PW1320-A




PAGE 2 of 5

an adequate response. If a longer time is determined necessary by the Owner, the Owner will, within three (3) business days of receipt of the request, notify the General Contractor of the anticipated response time. If the General Contractor submits a Request for Information on an activity with five (5) business days or less of float on the current project schedule, the General Contractor shall not be entitled to any time extension due to the time it takes the Architect to respond to the request provided that the Architect responds within the five (5) business days set forth above.

6. A Request for Information Response from Architect will not change any requirement of the Contract Documents. In the event the General Contractor believes that the Request for Information Response will cause a change to the requirements of the Contract Documents, the General Contractor shall within five (5) business days give written notice to the Project Manager and copy the Owner’s Representative and Architect stating that the General Contractor believes the Request for Information Response will result in a Change Order and the General Contractor intends to submit a Change Order Request. Failure to give such written notice within five (5) business days shall waive the General Contractor’s right to seek additional time or cost under these Requirements.

1.04 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. The Architect, with a copy to the Owner’s Representative, will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Price or Contract Time, on the "Architect’s Supplemental Instructions" Form as requested by the Owner.

1.05 PROPOSAL REQUEST

A. Architect/Owner-Initiated Requests For Proposals: The Owner, through the Architect, will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work to the General Contractor with a copy to the Project Manager that will require adjustment to the Contract Price and / or Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. Such requests shall be on a Request for Proposal form as required by the Owner.1. The Request for Proposal is issued for information only. Do not consider

them as an instruction either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within ten (10) business days of receipt of a Request for Proposal, submit a Change Order Proposal with the required information necessary to execute the change to the Project Manager with a copy to the Owner’s Representative and the Architect for the Architect’s/Owner's review.a. Include a list of quantities of products required and unit costs, with

the total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

PW1320-A




PAGE 3 of 5

c. Include a statement indicating the effect the proposed change in the Work will have on the Contract Time.

d. The Agency is tax exempt. All Contractors and their Subcontractors services provided under this Contract with the City of Stockton will not be exempt from taxes. All sales taxes and any other agency fees are to be identified by line item with the Change Order Proposal.

e. Dollar values shown on the Schedule of Values shall not be the governing (or deciding) final amounts for change orders involving either additional charges or deletions.

1.06 CHANGE ORDER PROPOSAL

A. When either a Request for Information from the General Contractor or a Request for Proposal from the Architect/Owner results in conditions that may require modifications to the Contract, the General Contractor may propose changes by submitting a Proposed Change Order to the Project Manager with a copy to the Owner’s Representative and the Architect in a format as required by the Owner. These forms shall also include Proposed Change Order Worksheets as required by the Owner.1. Include statements outlining the reasons for the change and the effect of

the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Price and / or the Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required and unit costs, with the total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities as directed by the Division 00 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction.

3. Indicate applicable delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

4. Comply with requirements in Section 01 25 13 Product Substitution Procedures if the proposed change requires an equal or substitution of one product or system for a product or system specified.

B. Change Order Request: Use Proposed Change Order and Proposed Change Order Worksheets of a format acceptable to the Owner. Owner’s approval of format is required prior to submission of first Proposed Change Order.

C. A Proposed Change Order cannot be submitted without either prior submission of a Request for Information from the General Contractor or as a response to a Request for Proposal submitted by the Architect or Owner.

D. Any Proposed Change Order submitted without a prior submittal of a Request for Information or as a response to a Request for Proposal will be immediately rejected and returned to the General Contractor.

PW1320-A




PAGE 4 of 5

1.07 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive (CCD): When the Owner and the General Contractor disagree on the terms of a Proposed Change Order, then the Architect, through the Project Manager, with a copy to the Owner’s Representative may issue a Construction Change Directive on a Construction Change Directive Form as authorized by the Owner. The Construction Change Directive instructs the General Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.1. The Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of the

change in the Work. It also designates the method to be followed to determine the change in the Contract Price and / or Contract Time.

2. General Contractor must proceed with the Work once a Construction Change Directive is issued.

3. The change in the Contract Price and / or Contract Time resulting from the issuance of a Construction Change Directive will be based on Time & Material or Unit Prices.

4. Issuance of Construction Change Directive does not guarantee payment for the Work described in the Construction Change Directive.

B. Documentation: The Project Manager shall maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive.1. After completion of the change, submit an itemized account and

supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.

2. The final value shall be negotiated based on the supporting data to determine the value of the work.

1.08 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. Upon the Owner's approval of a General Contractor’s Proposed Change Order, the Project Manager with a copy to the Owner’s Representative will issue a Change Order for signatures of the Architect, Owner, and the General Contractor on a Change Order Form as required by the Owner.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF DOCUMENT

PW1320-A

PROJECT LOCATIONSPROJECT TITLE

REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI)

To: HMR Architects(916) 736-2724

Attn: Kim Demongeye-mail: [email protected]

RFI No.

From: “Contractor”(___) ___-____

Attn: “Project Manager”_________________

e-mail address:_________________________

_____ pages returned on date __________ to:

“Contractor” “Project Manager” “Other”“e-mail” “e-mail” “e-mail”

Subject:

Drawing Sheet Ref: Specification Ref:

Date Issued: Response Req’d By:

Question/Proposed Solution:

Attached Number of Sheets:

Reply:

Reviewed By: Date:

District Project Representative Reply:

Reviewed By: Date:

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT AND CONDITIONAL ANDPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT UNCONDITIONAL WAIVER AND RELEASE FORMS

SECTION 01 29 00PAGE 1 of 8

SECTION 01 29 00

APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT AND CONDITIONAL AND UNCONDITIONAL WAIVER AND RELEASE FORMS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Applicable portions of Division 00

B. Section 01 77 00 – Closeout Procedures

C. Section 01 78 23 – Operation and Maintenance Data

D. Section 01 78 36 – Warranties

D. Section 01 78 39 – Project Record Documents

1.02 SECTION INCLUDES

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing the following:1. Schedule of Values2. Application for Payment

1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Submit the initial Schedule of Values to the Project Manager, Owner’s Representative, and the Architect at least 7 days before the initial Application for Payment. Update the Schedule of Values and resubmit to incorporate any comments from the Project Manager, Owner’s Representative, and the Architect prior to beginning the payment application process.

B. Format the Schedule of Values shal be the AIA Document G703 – Continuation Sheet (current version).

C. Use the Construction Specification Institute (CSI) Masterformat 2014 Edition and the Table of Contents of this Project Manual as a guide to determine the organization of division names and numbers.

D. Within each CSI division, include:1. For each subcontract within each division, provide an itemized listing of

subcontractor name, description of work, and contract amount.2. For each item of work performed by the Contractor as self‐performed

work, provide a line item description of the work, the dollar amount allocated, and the actual amount expended.

PW1320-A





3. Provide a line item cost allocation for General Conditions cost including one line item for direct reimbursable expenses, one line item for hourly payroll, one line item for supervisory / management payroll, and one line item for Overhead Percentage. For each line item, provide the actual amount expended.

E. Changes in the cost allocation of the Contractor’s self‐performed work or General Conditions cost shall be approved in writing by the Owner, Project Manager, and Architect before being submitted as additional line items in an Application for Payment. Any approved changes shall be explicitly noted as such on the revised AIA G703 for with each Application for Payment. Include a copy of the Owner’s written approval of such changes as back-up to each Application for Payment.

F. Provide a separate line item for each Change Order to the Contract. Do not allocate cost of change order to CSI divisions.

1.04 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Use AIA Document G702 – Application and Certificate for Payment and AIA G703 – Continuation Sheet as the form for the Application for Payment. Complete every entry on the form including the notarization and execution by authorized persons.

B. Submit Applications for Payment on a monthly basis.

C. Transmit two executed copies of each Application to the Owner and one executed copy to the Project Manager and the Architect. One copy to the Owner shall be complete including all waivers of lien and other attachments required by the Contract Documents.

D. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments, and recording appropriate information related to the application in a manner acceptable to the Owner, Project Manager, and the Architect.

E. Submit waivers of lien from subcontractors for the period of construction covered by the current application.

F. Submit certification that Record Drawing mark‐ups are updated through the current pay period per the requirements of Section 01 78 39 – Project Record Documents. Record Drawings must be verified and documented by the Project Manager prior to submitting the Application for Payment.

1.05 INITIAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

A. In addition to the requirements in paragraph 1.04, submit within 30 days of execution of the Agreement, documentation of all components of the labor compliance requirement of the City of Stockton. Documentation shall consist of

PW1320-A





copies of invoices for insurance premiums, employee records showing vacation time accrued, and other direct evidence of payment or actual costs incurred.

B. In addition to the requirements in paragraph 1.04, submit within 30 days of execution of the Agreement a completed Proposed Subcontractor Designation Form.

C. Approval of the Initial Application for Payment shall be contingent on complete and correct submittal of all the above identified information.

1.06 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT AT TIME OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. In addition to the requirements of paragraph 1.04, submit the following with the Application for Payment at the time of Substantial Completion.1. Temporary Use and Occupancy Permit for the project.2. Executed Substantial Completion Certificate including attached punch list

of incomplete items.

1.07 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

A. The Contractor shall complete the requirements of Section 01 77 00 – Closeout Procedures before submitting the Final Application for Payment.

B. In addition to the requirements of paragraph 1.04, submit the following with the Final Application for Payment.1. Operations and Maintenance Manuals and Warranties as required in

Sections 01 78 23 – Operation and Maintenance Data and 01 78 36 – Warranties.

2. Record Drawings as required in Section 01 78 39 – Project Record Documents.

3. All required final Release of Lien forms.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

Not Used.


Not Used.

END OF DOCUMENT

PW1320-A





CONDITIONAL WAIVER AND RELEASE

ON PROGRESS PAYMENT

(CIVIL CODE SECTION 8132)

NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT WAIVES THE CLAIMANT'S LIEN, STOP PAYMENT NOTICE, AND PAYMENT BOND RIGHTS EFFECTIVE ON RECEIPT OF PAYMENT. A PERSON SHOULD NOT RELY ON THIS DOCUMENT UNLESS SATISFIED THAT THE CLAIMANT HAS RECEIVED PAYMENT.

Name of Claimant:

Name of Customer:

Job Location:

Owner:

Through Date:

Conditional Waiver and Release

This document waives and releases lien, stop payment notice, and payment bond rights the claimant has for labor and service provided, and equipment and material delivered, to the customer on this job through the Through Date of this document. Rights based upon labor or service provided, or equipment or material delivered, pursuant to a written change order that has been fully executed by the parties prior to the date that this document is signed by the claimant, are waived and released by this document, unless listed as an Exception below. This document is effective only on the claimant's receipt of payment from the financial institution on which the following check is drawn:

Maker of Check:

Amount of Check: $

Check Payable to:

Exceptions

This document does not affect any of the following:

(1) Retentions.

(2) Extras for which the claimant has not received payment.

(3) The following progress payments for which the claimant has previously given a conditional waiver and release but has not received payment:

Date(s) of waiver and release:

Amount(s) of unpaid progress payment(s): $

PW1320-A





(4) Contract rights, including (A) a right based on rescission, abandonment, or breach of contract, and (B) the right to recover compensation for work not compensated by the payment.

Claimant's Signature:

Claimant's Title:

Date of Signature:

PW1320-A





UNCONDITIONAL WAIVER AND RELEASE

ON PROGRESS PAYMENT


NOTICE TO CLAIMANT: THIS DOCUMENT WAIVES AND RELEASES LIEN, STOP PAYMENT NOTICE, AND PAYMENT BOND RIGHTS UNCONDITIONALLY AND STATES THAT YOU HAVE BEEN PAID FOR GIVING UP THOSE RIGHTS. THIS DOCUMENT IS ENFORCEABLE AGAINST YOU IF YOU SIGN IT, EVEN IF YOU HAVE NOT BEEN PAID. IF YOU HAVE NOT BEEN PAID, USE A CONDITIONAL WAIVER AND RELEASE FORM.

Name of Claimant:

Name of Customer:

Job Location:

Owner:

Through Date:

Unconditional Waiver and Release

This document waives and releases lien, stop payment notice, and payment bond rights the claimant has for labor and service provided, and equipment and material delivered, to the customer on this job through the Through Date of this document. Rights based upon labor or service provided, or equipment or material delivered, pursuant to a written change order that has been fully executed by the parties prior to the date that this document is signed by the claimant, are waived and released by this document, unless listed as an Exception below. The claimant has received the following progress payment: $

Exceptions


(1) Retentions.

(2) Extras for which the claimant has not received payment.

(3) Contract rights, including (A) a right based on rescission, abandonment, or breach of contract, and (B) the right to recover compensation for work not compensated by the payment.


Claimant's Title:

Date of Signature:

PW1320-A





CONDITIONAL WAIVER AND RELEASE

ON FINAL PAYMENT


NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT WAIVES THE CLAIMANT'S LIEN, STOP PAYMENT NOTICE, AND PAYMENT BOND RIGHTS EFFECTIVE ON RECEIPT OF PAYMENT. A PERSON SHOULD NOT RELY ON THIS DOCUMENT UNLESS SATISFIED THAT THE CLAIMANT HAS RECEIVED PAYMENT.

Name of Claimant:

Name of Customer:

Job Location:

Owner:

Conditional Waiver and Release

This document waives and releases lien, stop payment notice, and payment bond rights the claimant has for labor and service provided, and equipment and material delivered, to the customer on this job. Rights based upon labor or service provided, or equipment or material delivered, pursuant to a written change order that has been fully executed by the parties prior to the date that this document is signed by the claimant, are waived and released by this document, unless listed as an Exception below. This document is effective only on the claimant's receipt of payment from the financial institution on which the following check is drawn:

Maker of Check:

Amount of Check: $

Check Payable to:

Exceptions


Disputed claims for extras in the amount of: $


Claimant's Title:

Date of Signature:

PW1320-A





UNCONDITIONAL WAIVER AND RELEASE

ON FINAL PAYMENT


NOTICE TO CLAIMANT: THIS DOCUMENT WAIVES AND RELEASES LIEN, STOP PAYMENT NOTICE, AND PAYMENT BOND RIGHTS UNCONDITIONALLY AND STATES THAT YOU HAVE BEEN PAID FOR GIVING UP THOSE RIGHTS. THIS DOCUMENT IS ENFORCEABLE AGAINST YOU IF YOU SIGN IT, EVEN IF YOU HAVE NOT BEEN PAID. IF YOU HAVE NOT BEEN PAID, USE A CONDITIONAL WAIVER AND RELEASE FORM.

Name of Claimant:

Name of Customer:

Job Location:

Owner:

Unconditional Waiver and Release

This document waives and releases lien, stop payment notice, and payment bond rights the claimant has for all labor and service provided, and equipment and material delivered, to the customer on this job. Rights based upon labor or service provided, or equipment or material delivered, pursuant to a written change order that has been fully executed by the parties prior to the date that this document is signed by the claimant, are waived and released by this document, unless listed as an Exception below. The claimant has been paid in full.

Exceptions


Disputed claims for extras in the amount of: $


Claimant's Title:

Date of Signature:

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON PROJECT MEETINGSPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 01 31 19

PAGE 1 of 3

SECTION 01 31 19

PROJECT MEETINGS

PART 1 – GENERAL



A. General Conditions; and


1.02 PRE-CONSTRUCTION “KICK-OFF” MEETING:

A. Prior to the start of construction, a conference will be called for the purpose of reviewing the construction program with the Contractor. At this conference, a general procedure shall be agreed upon between the Contractor, the Owner, and the Architect. All submittals shall be received and reviewed prior to Pre-Construction meeting.

B. Attendance: Owner's Representative; Architect and his Professional Consultants; Contractor's and/or their Superintendent; Major Subcontractors; Major Suppliers; and others as appropriate.

B. Suggested Agenda:

1. Distribution and discussions of:

a. List of major subcontractors and suppliers.b. Projected Construction Schedule.

2. Critical Work Sequence.

3. Major equipment deliveries and priorities.

4. Project Coordination.

a. Description of responsible personnel.b. Role of Inspectors.c. Contractor's coordination with Inspectors.d. Coordination of site visits for verified reports required by the

Building Officials or Manufacturer’s Representatives.

4. Procedures and processing of:

a. Field decisions.

PW1320-A




PAGE 2 of 3

b. Proposal requests.c. Change Orders.d. Applications for Payment.e. Prevailing Wage Requirements.f. Lien Releases.g. RFI’s

5. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents.Procedures for maintaining Record Documents and documents required for close-out.

6. Use of Premises:

a. Office, work, and storage areas.b. Hours of operation and site access.

7. Safety and first-aid procedures.

8. Housekeeping procedures.

1.03 PROGRESS MEETINGS:

A. Contractor shall schedule and hold regular weekly progress meetings after a minimum of one week's prior written notice of the meeting date and time to all Invitees as indicated below.

B. Location: As agreed upon by the Owner and the Contractor.

C. The Contractor shall notify and invite the following entities (“Invitees”):

1. Owner’s Representative.2. Contractor.3. Contractor's Project Manager.4. Contractor's Superintendent.5. Subcontractors, as appropriate to the agenda of the meeting.6. Suppliers, as appropriate to the agenda of the meeting.7. Project Manager, if any.8. Architect9. Engineer(s), if any and as appropriate to the agenda of the meeting.10. Others, as appropriate to the agenda of the meeting.

D. The Owner’s Representative, the Architect, and/or any engineering Consultants will attend at their discretion, in response to the agenda.

E. The Owner’s representative, the Project Manager, and/or another Owner Agents shall take and distribute meeting notes to attendees and other concerned parties. If exceptions are taken to anything in the meeting notes, those exceptions shall be provided in writing to the Owner within five (5) business days following the Owner’s distribution of the meeting notes.

PW1320-A




PAGE 3 of 3

1.04 PRE-INSTALLATION / PERFORMANCE MEETING:

A. Contractor shall schedule a meeting prior to the start of each of the following portions of the Work: cutting and patching of roofing structure, interruption or disconnection of utility services, and other weather-exposed and moisture-resistant products. Contractor shall invite all Invitees to this meeting, and others whose work may affect or be affected by the quality of these portions of work.

B. Contractor shall review in detail prior to this meeting, the manufacturer's requirements and specifications, applicable portions of the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, and other submittals, and other related work. At this meeting, invitees shall review and resolve conflicts, incompatibilities, or inadequacies discovered or anticipated.

C. Contractor shall review in detail Project conditions, schedule, requirements for performance, application, installation, and quality of completed Work, and protection of adjacent Work and property.

D. Contractor shall review in detail means of protecting the completed Work during the remainder of the construction period.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

Not Used


Not Used

END OF DOCUMENT

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON SCHEDULING OF WORKPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 01 32 13

PAGE 1 of 11

SECTION 01 32 13

SCHEDULING OF WORK

PART 1 – GENERAL



A. General Conditions;

B. Special Conditions;

C. Summary of Work; and

D. Submittals.

1.02 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. Scheduling of Work under this Contract shall be performed by Contractor in accordance with requirements of this Section.1. Development of schedule, cost and resource loading of the schedule,

monthly payment requests, and project status reporting requirements of the Contract shall employ computerized Critical Path Method (“CPM”) scheduling (“CPM Schedule”).

2. CPM Schedule shall be cost loaded based on Schedule of Values as approved by Owner.

3. Submit schedules and reports as specified in the General Conditions.

B. Upon Award of Contract, Contractor shall immediately commence development of Initial and Original CPM Schedules to ensure compliance with CPM Schedule submittal requirements.

1.03 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE:

A. Within ten (10) business days of the Notice to Proceed and in conjunction with the Schedule of Values, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Project Manager a construction progress schedule conforming to the Milestone Schedule below.

B. The construction schedule shall be based on the normal business hours of the site being 6:30 am to 3:30 pm Monday through Thursday and 6 am to 2:30pm on Fridays. Any scheduling of work outside of this time frame must be coordinated and approved by the Site and the Owner prior to being scheduled. Contractor shall make every effort to schedule the appropriate workforce to accomplish all work within this timeframe and within the milestones provided below.

PW1320-A




PAGE 2 of 11

C. The Construction Schedule shall be continuously updated, and an updated schedule shall be submitted with each application for progress payment. Each revised schedule shall indicate the work actually accomplished during the previous period and the schedule for completion of the remaining work.

D. Working days: Forty (40) days with liquidated damages of $1,900/day if work is not completed per the contract. Working days shall follow the Cal Trans construction workday calendar

1.04 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Contractor shall employ experienced scheduling personnel qualified to use the latest version of a program equal to Microsoft Project. Experience level required is set forth below. Contractor may employ such personnel directly or may employ a consultant for this purpose.1. The written statement shall identify the individual who will perform CPM

scheduling.2. Capability and experience shall be verified by description of construction

projects on which individual has successfully applied computerized CPM.3. Required level of experience shall include at least two (2) projects of

similar nature and scope with value not less than three fourths (3/4) of the Total Bid Price of this Project. The written statement shall provide contact persons for referenced projects with current telephone and address information.

B. Owner reserves the right to approve or reject Contractor’s scheduler or consultant at any time. Owner reserves the right to refuse replacing of Contractor’s scheduler or consultant, if Owner believes replacement will negatively affect the scheduling of Work under this Contract.

1.05 GENERAL

A. Progress Schedule shall be based on and incorporate milestones and completion dates specified in Contract Documents.

B. Overall time of completion and time of completion for each milestone shown on Progress Schedule shall adhere to times in the Contract, unless an earlier (advanced) time of completion is requested by Contractor and agreed to by Owner. Any such agreement shall be formalized by a Change Order.1. Owner is not required to accept an early completion schedule, i.e., one

that shows an earlier completion date than the Contract Time.2. Contractor shall not be entitled to extra compensation in event agreement

is reached on an earlier completion schedule and Contractor completes its Work, for whatever reason, beyond completion date shown in its early completion schedule but within the Contract Time.

3. A schedule showing the work completed in less than the Contract Time, and that has been accepted by Owner, shall be considered to have Project Float. The Project Float is the time between the scheduled

PW1320-A




PAGE 3 of 11

completion of the work and the Completion Date. Project Float is a resource available to both Owner and the Contractor.

C. Ownership Project Float: Neither the Owner nor Contractor owns Project Float. The Project owns the Project Float. As such, liability for delay of the Completion Date rests with the party whose actions, last in time, actually cause delay to the Completion Date.1. For example, if Party A uses some, but not all of the Project Float and

Party B later uses remainder of the Project Float as well as additional time beyond the Project Float, Party B shall be liable for the time that represents a delay to the Completion Date.

2. Party A would not be responsible for the time since it did not consume the entire Project Float and additional Project Float remained; therefore, the Completion Date was unaffected by Party A.

D. Progress Schedule shall be the basis for evaluating job progress, payment requests, and time extension requests. Responsibility for developing Contract CPM Schedule and monitoring actual progress as compared to Progress Schedule rests with Contractor.

E. Failure of Progress Schedule to include any element of the Work, or any inaccuracy in Progress Schedule, will not relieve Contractor from responsibility for accomplishing the Work in accordance with the Contract. Owner’s acceptance of schedule shall be for its use in monitoring and evaluating job progress, payment requests, and time extension requests and shall not, in any manner, impose a duty of care upon Owner, or act to relieve Contractor of its responsibility for means and methods of construction.

F. Software: Software shall be compatible with Windows operating system. Contractor shall transmit contract file to Owner on compact disk at times requested by Owner.

G. Transmit each item under the form approved by Owner.1. Identify Project with Owner Contract number and name of Contractor.2. Provide space for Contractor’s approval stamp and Owner’s review

stamps.3. Submittals received from sources other than Contractor will be returned to

the Contractor without Owner’s review.

1.06 INITIAL CPM SCHEDULE

A. Initial CPM Schedule submitted for review at the pre-construction conference shall serve as Contractor’s schedule for up to fifteen (15) calendar days after the Notice to Proceed.

B. Indicate detailed plan for the Work to be completed in first ninety (90) days of the Contract; details of planned mobilization of plant and equipment; sequence of early operations; procurement of materials and equipment. Show Work beyond ninety (90) calendar days in summary form.

PW1320-A




PAGE 4 of 11

C. Initial CPM Schedule shall be time scaled.

D. Initial CPM Schedule shall be cost and resource loaded. Accepted cost and resource loaded schedule will be used as basis for monthly progress payments until acceptance of the Original CPM Schedule. Use of Initial CPM Schedule for progress payments shall not exceed ninety (90) calendar days.

E. Owner and Contractor shall meet to review and discuss the Initial CPM Schedule within five (5) business days after it has been submitted to Owner.1. Owner’s review and comment on the schedule shall be limited to Contract

conformance (with sequencing, coordination, and milestone requirements).

2. Contractor shall make corrections to schedule necessary to comply with Contract requirements and shall adjust schedule to incorporate any missing information requested by Owner. Contractor shall resubmit Initial CPM Schedule if requested by Owner.

F. If, during the first ninety (90) days after Notice to Proceed, the Contractor is of the opinion that any of the Work included on its Initial CPM Schedule has been impacted, the Contractor shall submit to Owner a written Time Impact Evaluation (“TIE”) in accordance with Article 1.12 of this Section. The TIE shall be based on the most current update of the Initial CPM Schedule.

1.07 ORIGINAL CPM SCHEDULE

A. Submit a detailed proposed Original CPM Schedule presenting an orderly and realistic plan for completion of the Work in conformance with requirements as specified herein.

B. Progress Schedule shall include or comply with the following requirements:1. Time scaled, cost and resource (labor and major equipment) loaded CPM

schedule.2. No activity on schedule shall have duration longer than fifteen (15)

calendar days, with exception of submittal, approval, fabrication and procurement activities, unless otherwise approved by Owner.a. Activity durations shall be total number of actual work days

required to perform that activity.

3. The start and completion dates of all items of Work, their major components, and milestone completion dates, if any, and required testing or inspections.

4. Owner furnished materials and equipment, if any, identified as separate activities.

5. Activities for maintaining Project Record Documents.6. Dependencies (or relationships) between activities.7. Processing/approval of submittals and shop drawings for all material and

equipment required per the Contract. Activities that are dependent on

PW1320-A




PAGE 5 of 11

submittal acceptance or material delivery shall not be scheduled to start earlier than expected acceptance or delivery dates.a. Include time for submittals, re-submittals, and reviews by Owner.

Coordinate with accepted schedule for submission of Shop Drawings, samples, and other submittals.

b. Contractor shall be responsible for all impacts resulting from re-submittal of Shop Drawings and submittals.

8. Procurement of major equipment, through receipt and inspection at jobsite, identified as separate activity.a. Include time for fabrication and delivery of manufactured products

for the Work.b. Show dependencies between procurement and construction.

9. Activity description; what Work is to be accomplished and where. Specify areas based on portion of building or grid line.

10. The total cost of performing each activity shall be the total of labor, material, and equipment, excluding overhead and profit of Contractor. Overhead and profit of the General Contractor shall be shown as a separate activity in the schedule. Sum of cost for all activities shall equal total Contract value.

11. Resources required (labor and major equipment) to perform each activity.12. Responsibility code for each activity corresponding to Contractor or

Subcontractor responsible for performing the Work.13. Identify the activities which constitute the controlling operations or critical

path. No more than twenty-five (25%) of the activities shall be critical or near critical. Near critical is defined as float in the range of one (1) to ten (10) days.

14. Twenty (20) workdays for developing punch list(s), completion of punch-list items, and final clean up for the Work or any designated portion thereof. All other activities shall be completed prior to this period.

15. Interface with the work of other contractors, Owner, and agencies such as, but not limited to, utility companies.

16. Show detailed Subcontractor Work activities. In addition, furnish copies of Subcontractor schedules upon which CPM was built.a. Also furnish for each Subcontractor, as determined by Owner,

submitted on Subcontractor letterhead, a statement certifying that Subcontractor concurs with Contractor’s Original CPM Schedule and that Subcontractor’s related schedules have been incorporated, including activity duration, cost and resource loading.

b. Subcontractor schedules shall be independently derived and not a copy of Contractor’s schedule.

c. In addition to Contractor's schedule and resource loading, obtain from electrical, mechanical, and plumbing Subcontractors, and other Subcontractors as required by Owner, productivity calculations common to their trades, such as units per person day, feet of pipe per day per person, feet of wiring per day per person, and similar information.

PW1320-A




PAGE 6 of 11

d. Furnish schedule for Contractor / Subcontractor CPM schedule meetings which shall be held prior to submission of Original CPM schedule to Owner. Owner shall be permitted to attend scheduled meetings as an observer.

17. Activity durations shall be in Work days.18. Submit with the schedule a list of anticipated non Work days, such as

weekends and holidays. The Progress Schedule shall exclude in its Work day calendar all non Work days on which Contractor anticipates critical Work will not be performed.

C. Original CPM Schedule Review Meeting: Contractor shall, within sixty (60) days from the Notice to Proceed date, meet with Owner and Project Manager to review the Original CPM Schedule submittal.1. Contractor shall have its Project Superintendent, Project Scheduler, and

key Subcontractor representatives, as required by Owner, in attendance. The meeting will take place over a continuous one (1) day period.

2. Owner’s review will be limited to submittal’s conformance to Contract requirements including, but not limited to, coordination requirements. However, review may also include:a. Clarifications of Contract Requirements.b. Directions to include activities and information missing from

submittal.c. Requests to Contractor to clarify its schedule.

3. Within five (5) days of the Schedule Review Meeting, Contractor shall respond in writing to all questions and comments expressed by Owner at the Meeting.

1.08 ADJUSTMENTS TO CPM SCHEDULE

A. Adjustments to Original CPM Schedule: Contractor shall have adjusted the Original CPM Schedule submittal to address all review comments from original CPM Schedule review meeting and resubmit network diagrams and reports for Owner’s review.1. Owner, within ten (10) days from date that Contractor submitted the

revised schedule, will either:a. Accept schedule and cost and resource loaded activities as

submitted, orb. Advise Contractor in writing to review any part or parts of schedule

which either do not meet Contract requirements or are unsatisfactory for Owner to monitor Project’s progress, resources, and status or evaluate monthly payment request by Contractor.

2. Owner may accept schedule with conditions that the first monthly CPM Schedule update be revised to correct deficiencies identified.

3. When schedule is accepted, it shall be considered the “Original CPM Schedule” which will then be immediately updated to reflect the current status of the work.

PW1320-A




PAGE 7 of 11

4. Owner reserves right to require Contractor to adjust, add to, or clarify any portion of schedule which may later be discovered to be insufficient for monitoring of Work or approval of partial payment requests. No additional compensation will be provided for such adjustments, additions, or clarifications.

B. Acceptance of Contractor’s schedule by Owner will be based solely upon schedule’s compliance with Contract requirements.1. By way of Contractor assigning activity durations and proposing

sequence of Work, Contractor agrees to utilize sufficient and necessary management and other resources to perform work in accordance with the schedule.

2. Upon submittal of schedule update, updated schedule shall be considered “current” CPM Schedule.

3. Submission of Contractor’s schedule to Owner shall not relieve Contractor of total responsibility for scheduling, sequencing, and pursuing Work to comply with requirements of Contract Documents, including adverse effects such as delays resulting from ill timed Work.

C. Submittal of Original CPM Schedule, and subsequent schedule updates, shall be understood to be Contractor’s representation that the Schedule meets requirements of Contract Documents and that Work shall be executed in sequence indicated on the schedule.

D. Contractor shall distribute Original CPM Schedule to Subcontractors for review and written acceptance, which shall be noted on Subcontractors’ letterheads to Contractor and transmitted to Owner for the record.

1.09 MONTHLY CPM SCHEDULE UPDATE SUBMITTALS

A. Following acceptance of Contractor’s Original CPM Schedule, Contractor shall monitor progress of Work and adjust schedule each month to reflect actual progress and any anticipated changes to planned activities.1. Each schedule update submitted shall be complete, including all

information requested for the Original CPM Schedule submittal.2. Each update shall continue to show all Work activities including those

already completed. These completed activities shall accurately reflect “as built” information by indicating when activities were actually started and completed.

B. A meeting will be held on approximately the twenty fifth (25th) of each month to review the schedule update submittal and progress payment application.1. At this meeting, at a minimum, the following items will be reviewed:

Percent (%) complete of each activity; Time Impact Evaluations for Change Orders and Time Extension Request; actual and anticipated activity sequence changes; actual and anticipated duration changes; and actual and anticipated Contractor delays.

2. These meetings are considered a critical component of overall monthly schedule update submittal and Contractor shall have appropriate

PW1320-A




PAGE 8 of 11

personnel attend. At a minimum, these meetings shall be attended by Contractor’s General Superintendent and Scheduler.

3. Contractor shall plan on the meeting taking no less than four (4) hours.

C. Within five (5) working days after monthly schedule update meeting, Contractor shall submit the updated CPM Schedule update.

D. Within five (5) work days of receipt of above noted revised submittals, Owner will either accept or reject monthly schedule update submittal.1. If accepted, percent (%) complete shown in monthly update will be basis

for Application for Payment by the Contractor. The schedule update shall be submitted as part of the Contractor’s Application for Payment.

2. If rejected, update shall be corrected and resubmitted by Contractor before the Application for Payment is submitted.

E. Neither updating, changing or revising of any report, curve, schedule, or narrative submitted to Owner by Contractor under this Contract, nor Owner’s review or acceptance of any such report, curve, schedule or narrative shall have the effect of amending or modifying in any way the Completion Date or milestone dates or of modifying or limiting in any way Contractor’s obligations under this Contract.

1.10 SCHEDULE REVISIONS

A. Updating the Schedule to reflect actual progress shall not be considered revisions to the Schedule. Since scheduling is a dynamic process, revisions to activity durations and sequences are expected on a monthly basis.

B. To reflect revisions to the schedule, the Contractor shall provide Owner with a written narrative with a full description and reasons for each Work activity revised. For revisions affecting the sequence of work, the Contractor shall provide a schedule diagram which compares the original sequence to the revised sequence of work. The Contractor shall provide the written narrative and schedule diagram for revisions two (2) working days in advance of the monthly schedule update meeting.

C. Schedule revisions shall not be incorporated into any schedule update until the revisions have been reviewed by Owner. Owner may request further information and justification for schedule revisions and Contractor shall, within three (3) days, provide Owner with a complete written narrative response to Owner’s request.

D. If the Contractor’s revision is still not accepted by Owner, and the Contractor disagrees with Owner’s position, the Contractor has seven (7) calendar days from receipt of Owner’s letter rejecting the revision to provide a written narrative providing full justification and explanation for the revision. The Contractor’s failure to respond in writing within seven (7) calendar days of Owner’s written rejection of a schedule revision shall be contractually interpreted as acceptance of Owner’s position, and the Contractor waives its rights to subsequently dispute or file a claim regarding Owner’s position.

PW1320-A




PAGE 9 of 11

E. At Owner’s discretion, the Contractor can be required to provide Subcontractor certifications of performance regarding proposed schedule revisions affecting said Subcontractors.

1.11 RECOVERY SCHEDULE

A. If the Schedule Update shows a completion date twenty-one (21) calendar days beyond the Contract Completion Date, or individual milestone completion dates, the Contractor shall submit to Owner the proposed revisions to recover the lost time within seven (7) calendar days. As part of this submittal, the Contractor shall provide a written narrative for each revision made to recapture the lost time. If the revisions include sequence changes, the Contractor shall provide a schedule diagram comparing the original sequence to the revised sequence of work.

B. The revisions shall not be incorporated into any schedule update until the revisions have been reviewed by Owner.

C. If the Contractor’s revisions are not accepted by Owner, Owner and the Contractor shall follow the procedures in paragraph 1.09.C, 1.09.D and 1.09.E above.

D. At Owner’s discretion, the Contractor can be required to provide Subcontractor certifications for revisions affecting said Subcontractors.

1.12 TIME IMPACTS EVALUATION (“TIE”) FOR CHANGE ORDERS, AND OTHER DELAYS

A. When Contractor is directed to proceed with changed Work, the Contractor shall prepare and submit within fourteen (14) calendar days from the Notice to Proceed a TIE which includes both a written narrative and a schedule diagram depicting how the changed Work affects other schedule activities. The schedule diagram shall show how the Contractor proposes to incorporate the changed Work in the schedule and how it impacts the current schedule-update critical path. The Contractor is also responsible for requesting time extensions based on the TIE’s impact on the critical path. The diagram must be tied to the main sequence of schedule activities to enable Owner to evaluate the impact of changed Work to the scheduled critical path.

B. Contractor shall be required to comply with the requirements of Paragraph 1.09.A for all types of delays such as, but not limited to, Contractor/Subcontractor delays, adverse weather delays, strikes, procurement delays, fabrication delays, etc.

C. Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with the preparation of TIEs, and the process of incorporating them into the current schedule update. The Contractor shall provide Owner with four (4) copies of each TIE.

D. Once agreement has been reached on a TIE, the Contract Time will be adjusted accordingly. If agreement is not reached on a TIE, the Contract Time may be

PW1320-A




PAGE 10 of 11

extended in an amount Owner allows, and the Contractor may submit a claim for additional time claimed by contractor.

1.13 TIME EXTENSIONS

A. The Contractor is responsible for requesting time extensions for time impacts that, in the opinion of the Contractor, impact the critical path of the current schedule update. Notice of time impacts shall be given in accord with the General Conditions.

B. Where an event for which Owner is responsible impacts the projected Completion Date, the Contractor shall provide a written mitigation plan, including a schedule diagram, which explains how (e.g., increase crew size, overtime, etc.) the impact can be mitigated. The Contractor shall also include a detailed cost breakdown of the labor, equipment, and material the Contractor would expend to mitigate Owner-caused time impact. The Contractor shall submit its mitigation plan to Owner within fourteen (14) calendar days from the date of discovery of the impact. The Contractor is responsible for the cost to prepare the mitigation plan.

C. Failure to request time, provide TIE, or provide the required mitigation plan will result in Contractor waiving its right to a time extension and cost to mitigate the delay.

D. No time will be granted under this Contract for cumulative effect of changes.

E. Owner will not be obligated to consider any time extension request unless the Contractor complies with the requirements of Contract Documents.

F. Failure of the Contractor to perform in accordance with the current schedule update shall not be excused by submittal of time extension requests.

G. If the Contractor does not submit a TIE within the required fourteen (14) calendar days for any issue, it is mutually agreed that the Contractor does not require a time extension for said issue.

1.14 WEEKLY SCHEDULE REPORT

At the Weekly Progress Meeting, the Contractor shall provide and present a time-scaled three (3) week look-ahead schedule that is based and correlated by activity number to the current schedule (i.e., Initial, Original CPM, or Schedule Update).

PW1320-A




PAGE 11 of 11

1.15 DAILY CONSTRUCTION REPORTS

On a daily basis, Contractor shall submit a daily activity report to Owner for each workday, including weekends and holidays when worked. Contractor shall develop the daily construction reports on a computer-generated database capable of sorting daily Work, manpower, and manhours by Contractor, Subcontractor, area, sub-area, and Change Order Work. Upon request of Owner, furnish computer disk of this data base. Obtain Owner’s written approval of daily construction report data base format prior to implementation. Include in report:

A. Project name and Project number.

B. Contractor’s name and address.

C. Weather, temperature, and any unusual site conditions.

D. Brief description and location of the day’s scheduled activities and any special problems and accidents, including Work of Subcontractors. Descriptions shall be referenced to CPM scheduled activities.

E. Worker quantities for its own Work force and for Subcontractors of any tier.

F. Equipment, other than hand tools, utilized by Contractor and Subcontractors.

1.16 PERIODIC VERIFIED REPORTS

Contractor shall complete and verify construction reports on a form prescribed by the City of Stockton and file reports as requested by the Owner during the preceding month; at the completion of the Contract; at the completion of the Work; at the suspension of Work for a period of more than one (1) month; whenever the services of Contractor or any of Contractor’s Subcontractors are terminated for any reason; and at any time a special verified report is required by the City of Stockton.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

Not Used


Not Used

END OF DOCUMENT

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON SUBMITTALSPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 01 33 00

PAGE 1 of 9

SECTION 01 33 00

SUBMITTALS

PART 1 – GENERAL



A. General Conditions, including, without limitation, Contractor’s Submittals and Schedules, Drawings, and Specifications;



A. Definitions:

1. Shop Drawings and Product Data are as indicated in the General Conditions and include, but are not limited to, fabrication, erection, layout and setting drawings, formwork and falsework drawings, manufacturers' standard drawings, descriptive literature, catalogues, brochures, performance and test data, wiring diagrams, and control diagrams. In addition, there are other drawings and descriptive data pertaining to materials, equipment, piping, ducts, and conduit systems, and methods of construction as may be required to show that the materials, equipment, or systems and all positions conform to the requirement of the Contract Documents, including, without limitation, the Drawings.

2. "Manufactured" applies to standard units usually mass-produced; "fabricated" means specifically assembled or made out of selected materials to meet design requirements. Shop Drawings shall establish the actual detail of manufactured or fabricated items, indicated proper relation to adjoining work and amplify design details of mechanical and electrical equipment in proper relation to physical spaces in the structure.

3. Manufacturer's Instructions: Where any item of Work is required by the Contract Documents to be furnished, installed, or performed, at a minimum, in accordance with a specified product manufacturer's instructions, the Contractor shall procure and distribute copies of these to the Owner, the Architect, and all other concerned parties and shall furnish, install, or perform the work, at a minimum, in accordance with those instructions.

B. Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other items as specified, in accordance with the following requirements:

PW1320-A




PAGE 2 of 9

1. Contractor shall submit all Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples to the Owner, the Architect, the Project Inspector, and the Construction Manager.

2. Contractor shall comply with all time frames herein and in the General Conditions and, in any case, shall submit required information in sufficient time to permit proper consideration and action before ordering any materials or items represented by such Shop Drawings, Product Data, and/or Samples.

3. Contractor shall comply with all time frames herein and in the General Conditions and, in any case, shall allow sufficient time so that no delay occurs due to required lead time in ordering or delivery of any item to the Site. Contractor shall be responsible for any delay in progress of Work due to its failure to observe these requirements.

4. Time for completion of Work shall not be extended on account of Contractor's failure to promptly submit Shop Drawings, Product Data, and/or Samples.

5. Reference numbers on Shop Drawings shall have Architectural and/or Engineering Contract Drawings reference numbers for details, sections, and “cuts” shown on Shop Drawings. These reference numbers shall be in addition to any numbering system that Contractor chooses to use or has adopted as standard.

6. When the magnitude or complexity of submittal material prevents a complete review within the stated time frame, Contractor shall make this submittal in increments to avoid extended delays.

7. Contractor shall certify on submittals for review that submittals conform to Contract requirements. In event of any variance, Contractor shall specifically state in transmittal and on Shop Drawings, portions vary and require approval of a substitute. Also certify that Contractor-furnished equipment can be installed in allocated space.

8. Unless specified otherwise, sampling, preparation of samples, and tests shall be in accordance with the latest standard of the American Society for Testing and Materials.

9. Upon demand by Architect or Owner, Contractor shall submit samples of materials and/or articles for tests or examinations and consideration before Contractor incorporates same in Work. Contractor shall be solely responsible for delays due to sample(s) not being submitted in time to allow for tests. Acceptance or rejection will be expressed in writing. Work shall be equal to approved samples in every respect. Samples that are of value after testing will remain the property of Contractor.

C. Submittal Schedule:

1. Contractor shall prepare its proposed submittal schedule submit to the Owner within ten (10) days after the date Contractor is given notice of award. Contractor's proposed schedule shall include the Project Submittal Schedule to be approved by the Owner. All submittals shall be sent in for review prior to the Pre-Construction meeting.

2. Contractor is responsible for all lost time should the initial submittal be rejected, marked "revised and resubmit", etc.

PW1320-A




PAGE 3 of 9

3. All Submittals shall be forwarded to the Owner by the date indicated on the approved Submittal Schedule, unless an earlier date is necessary to maintain the Construction Schedule, in which case those Submittals shall be forwarded to the Owner so as not to delay the Construction Schedule.

1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS:

A. Contractor shall submit all submittals electronically in first generation Portable Document Format (PDF), except for items requiring review of colors or textures. An electronic file will be returned to the Contractor after final review to be distributed to its intended recipients.

B. Before commencing installation of any Work, the Contractor shall submit and receive approval of all drawings, descriptive data, manufacturer’s cut sheet and Safety Data Sheets, and material list(s) as required to accomplish Work.

C. Review of Shop Drawings is regarded as a service to assist Contractor and in all cases original Contract Documents shall take precedence as outlined under the General Conditions.

D. No claim for extra time or payment shall be based on work shown on Shop Drawings unless the claim is (1) noted on Contractor's transmittal letter accompanying Shop Drawings and (2) Contractor has complied with all applicable provisions of the General Conditions, including, without limitation, provisions regarding changes and payment, and all required written approvals.

E. Owner shall not review Shop Drawings for quantities of materials or number of items supplied. Review is for general conformance to the Contract Documents only.

F. Owner's and/or Architect’s review of Shop Drawing will be general. Owner and/or Architect review does not relieve Contractor of responsibility for accuracy, proper fitting, construction of Work, furnishing of materials, or Work required by Contract Documents and not indicated on Shop Drawings. Shop Drawing reviewed by Owner and/or Architect is not to be construed as approving departures from Contract Documents.

G. Review of Shop Drawings and Schedules does not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any aspect of those Drawings or Schedules that is a violation of local, County, State, or Federal laws, rules, ordinances, or rules and regulations of commissions, boards, or other authorities or utilities having jurisdiction.

H. Before submitting Shop Drawings for review, Contractor shall check Shop Drawings of its subcontractors for accuracy, and confirm that all Work contiguous with and having bearing on other work shown on Shop Drawings is accurately drawn and in conformance with Contract Documents.

PW1320-A




PAGE 4 of 9

I. Submitted drawings and details must bear stamp of approval of Contractor:

1. Stamp and signature shall clearly certify that Contractor has checked Shop Drawings for compliance with Drawings.

2. If Contractor submits a Shop Drawing without an executed stamp of approval, or whenever it is evident (despite stamp) that Drawings have not been checked, the Owner and/or Architect will not consider them and will return them to the Contractor for revision and resubmission. In that event, it will be deemed that Contractor has not complied with this provision and Contractor shall bear risk of all delays to same extent as if it had not submitted any Shop Drawings or details.

3. Contractor shall review Shop Drawings and provide any and all Field Verified information required including but not limited to Dimensions, Clearances, existing adjacent materials, etc. prior to submitting to the Owner / Architect.

J. Submission of Shop Drawings (in either original submission or when resubmitted with correction) constitutes evidence that Contractor has checked all information thereon and that it accepts and is willing to perform Work as shown.

K. Contractor shall pay for cost of any changes in construction due to improper checking and coordination. Contractor shall be responsible for all additional costs, including coordination. Contractor shall be responsible for costs incurred by itself, the Owner, the Architect, the Project Inspector, the Project Manager, any other Subcontractor or contractor, etc., due to improperly checked and/or coordination of submittals.

L. Shop Drawings must clearly delineate the following information:

1. Project name and address.2. Specification number and description.3. Architect's name and project number.4. Shop Drawing title, number, date, and scale.5. Names of Contractor, Subcontractor(s) and fabricator.6. Working and erection dimensions.7. Arrangements and sectional views.8. Necessary details, including complete information for making connections

with other Work.9. Kinds of materials and finishes.10. Descriptive names of materials and equipment, classified item numbers,

and locations at which materials or equipment are to be installed in the Work. Contractor shall use same reference identification(s) as shown on Contract Drawings.

M. Contractor shall prepare composite drawings and installation layouts when required to solve tight field conditions.

1. Shop Drawings shall consist of dimensioned plans and elevations and must give complete information, particularly as to size and location of

PW1320-A




PAGE 5 of 9

sleeves, inserts, attachments, openings, conduits, ducts, boxes, structural interferences, etc.

2. Contractor shall coordinate these composite Shop Drawings and installation layouts in the field between itself and its Subcontractor(s) for proper relationship to the Work, the work of other trades, and the field conditions. The Contractor shall check and approve all submittal(s) before submitting them for final review.

1.04 PRODUCT DATA OR NON REPRODUCIBLE SUBMITTALS:

A. Contractor shall submit manufacturer's printed literature in original electronic PDF form. Any fading type of reproduction will be rejected and returned for resubmitting. Each submittal shall have a Submittal Cover Sheet (see attached at end of this section) as the first page of every submittal with all pertinent information filled in by the Contractor prior to delivery.

B. Contractor shall submit electronically a complete list of all major items of mechanical, plumbing, and electrical equipment and materials in accordance with the approved Submittal Schedule, except as required earlier to comply with the approved Construction Schedule. Other items specified are to be submitted prior to commencing Work. Contractor shall submit items of like kind at one time in a neat and orderly manner. Partial lists will not be acceptable.

C. Submittals shall include manufacturer's specifications, physical dimensions, and ratings of all equipment. Contractor shall furnish performance curves for all pumps and fans. Where printed literature describes items in addition to that item being submitted, submitted item shall be clearly marked on sheet and superfluous information shall be crossed out. If highlighting is used, Contractor shall mark all copies.

D. Equipment submittals shall be complete and include space requirements, weight, electrical and mechanical requirements, performance data, and supplemental information that may be requested.

E. Contractor shall accumulate additional copies of any and all Safety Data Sheets (SDS) documentation from each required submittal into a dedicated 3 ring D-ring binder, tabbed by CSI section to be provided during project close-out. See requirements of Section 01 78 39: Project Record Documents.

1.05 SAMPLES:

A. Contractor shall submit for approval Samples as required and within the time frame in the Contract Documents. Materials such as concrete, mortar, etc., which require on-site testing will be reviewed at the Project Site.

B. Contractor shall submit four (4) samples except where greater or lesser number is specifically required by Contract Documents including, without limitation, the Specifications.

PW1320-A




PAGE 6 of 9

1. Samples must be of sufficient size and quality to clearly illustrate functional characteristics, with integrally related parts and attachment devices.

2. Samples must show full range of texture, color, and pattern.3. When no other requirement is specified, assume that each sample shall

be 8 1/2” x 11” in size.

C. Contractor shall make all Submittals, unless it has authorized Subcontractor(s) to submit and Contractor has notified the Owner in writing to this effect.

D. Samples to be shipped prepaid or hand-delivered to the Owner.

E. Contractor shall mark samples to show name of Project, name of Contractor submitting, Contract number and segment of Work where representative Sample will be used, all applicable Specifications Sections and documents, Contract Drawing Number and detail, and ASTM or FS reference, if applicable.

F. Contractor shall not deliver any material to Site prior to receipt of Owner's and/or Architect’s completed written review and approval. Contractor shall furnish materials equal in every respect to approved Samples and execute Work in conformance therewith.

G. Owner's and/or Architect’s review, acceptance, and/or approval of Sample(s) will not preclude rejections of any material upon discovery of defects in same prior to final acceptance of completed Work.

H. After a material has been approved, no change in brand or make will be permitted.

I. Contractor shall prepare its Submittal Schedule and submit Samples of materials requiring laboratory tests to specified laboratory for testing not less than ninety (90) days before such materials are required to be used in Work.

J. Samples which are rejected must be resubmitted promptly after notification of rejection and be marked "Resubmitted Sample" in addition to other information required.

K. Field Samples and Mock-Ups are to be removed by Contractor at Owner’s direction:

1. Size: As Specified.2. Furnish catalog numbers and similar data, as requested.

1.06 CONTRACTOR’S WORK INFORMATION:

A. Contractor shall prepare, and submit an Injury and Illness Prevention Program (IIPP) document for all types of work and trades involved in the project to the Owner. Owner approval must be obtained prior to mobilization.

PW1320-A




PAGE 7 of 9

1.07 REVIEW AND RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS:

A. The Owner will arrange for review of Sample(s), Shop Drawing(s), Product Data, and other submittal(s) by appropriate reviewer(s) and return to Contractor as provided below within ten (10) business days after receipt or within ten (10) days after receipt of all related information necessary for such review, whichever is later.

B. An electronic file of product or materials data will be returned to Contractor with the reviewer’s stamp and all comments.

C. Samples to be incorporated into the Work will be returned to Contractor, together with a written notice designating the Sample with the appropriate review status and indicating errors discovered on review, if any. Other Samples will not be returned, but the same notice will be given with respect thereto, and that notice shall be considered a return of the Sample.

D. Contractor shall revise and resubmit any Sample(s), Shop Drawing(s), Product Data, and other submittal(s) as required by the reviewer. Such resubmittals will be reviewed and returned in the same manner as original Sample(s), Shop Drawing(s), Product Data, and other submittal(s), within ten (10) business days after receipt thereof or within ten (10) days after receipt of all related information necessary for such review.

E. Contractor may proceed with any of the Work covered by Sample(s), Shop Drawing(s), Product Data, and other submittal(s) upon its return if designated as no exception taken, or revise as noted, provided the Contractor proceeds in accordance with the Owner and/or the Architect’s notes and comments.

F. Contractor shall not begin any of the work covered by a Sample(s), Shop Drawing(s), Product Data, and other submittal(s), designated as revise and resubmit or rejected, until a revision or correction thereof has been reviewed and returned to Contractor.

G. Sample(s), Shop Drawing(s), Product Data, and other submittal(s) designated as revise and resubmit or rejected will require resubmittal and shall be revised or corrected and resubmitted to the Owner no later than fourteen (14) days or a shorter period as required to comply with the approved Construction Schedule, after its return to Contractor.

H. Neither the review nor the lack of review of any Sample(s), Shop Drawing(s), Product Data, and other submittal(s) shall waive any of the requirements of the Contract Documents, or relieve Contractor of any obligation thereunder.

I. Owner's and/or Architect’s review of Shop Drawings does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any errors that may exist. Contractor is responsible for the dimensions and design of adequate connections and details and for satisfactory construction of all the Work.

PW1320-A




PAGE 8 of 9

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

Not Used


Not Used

END OF DOCUMENT

PW1320-A




PAGE 9 of 9

ROOFING AND HVAC REPLACEMENT – PW1320PROJECT SUBMITTAL

To: HMR Architects, Inc.Phone # (916) 736-2724

Attn: Kim DemongeyE-mail: [email protected]

From: “Company NamePhone #

Attn: NameE-mail:

Subcontractor:

Submittal No.:

Specification Section:

Subject:Contractors

Review Stamp

Comments:

Architect’sReview Stamp

Engineer’sReview Stamp

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES FOR SITE STANDARDSPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 01 35 13.23

PAGE 1 of 3

SECTION 01 35 13.23

SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES FOR SITE STANDARDS

PART – GENERAL



A. General Conditions, including without limitation, Site Access, Conditions, and Regulations;


C. Drug-Free Workplace Certification;

D. Tobacco-Free Environment Certification;

E. Criminal Background Investigation/Fingerprinting Certification;

F. Temporary Facilities and Controls.

G. Injury and Illness Prevention Program (IIPP) submittal.

H. Cal/OSHA safety procedures.

1.02 REQUIREMENTS OF THE OWNER:

A. Drug-Free Site and Safety Requirements:

1. This site and other Owner Facilities have been declared “Drug-Free Zones.” No drugs, alcohol, and/or smoking are allowed at any time in any buildings and/or grounds on Owner’s property. No public, staff, visitors, or contractors are to use drugs on these sites.

2. Smoking and the use of tobacco products by all persons is prohibited on or in Owner’s property. Owner’s property includes buildings, grounds, owned vehicles, and vehicles owned by others while on Owner’s property. Contractor shall post: "Non-Smoking Area" in a highly visible location on Site. Contractor may designate a smoking area outside of Owner’s property within the public right-of-way, provided that this area remains quiet and unobtrusive to adjacent neighbors. This smoking area is to be kept clean at all times.

3. Contractor shall ensure that no alcohol, firearms, weapons, or controlled substances enter or are used at the Site. Contractor shall immediately

PW1320-A




PAGE 2 of 3

remove from the Site and terminate the employment of any employee(s) found in violation of this provision.

B. Language: Unacceptable and/or loud language will not be tolerated, "Cat calls" or other derogatory language toward staff or the public will not be allowed.

C. Disturbing the Peace (Noise and Lighting):

1. Contractor shall observe the noise ordinance of the Site at all times including, without limitation, all applicable local, city, and/or state laws, ordinances, and/or regulations regarding noise and allowable noise levels.

2. The use of radios, etc., shall be controlled to keep all sound at a level that cannot be heard beyond the immediate area of use. Owner reserves the right to prohibit the use of radios at the Site, except for handheld communication radios (e.g., Nextel phones or walky-talkies).

3. If portable lights are used after dark, all light must be located so as not to direct light into neighboring property.

D. Traffic:

1. Driving on the premises shall be limited to periods when staff is present. Deliveries must be made 6:30 am to 3:00 pm Monday through Thursday or 6 am to 2 pm on Fridays; one (1) or more ground guides shall lead the vehicle across the area of travel. In no case shall driving take place across pedestrian paths. The speed limit on the Premises shall be five (5) miles per hour (maximum) or less if conditions require.

2. All paths of travel for deliveries, including without limitation, material, equipment, and supply deliveries, shall be reviewed and approved by Owner in advance. Any damage will be repaired to the pre-damaged condition by the Contractor.

3. Owner shall designate a construction entry to the Site. If Contractor requests, Owner determines it is required, and to the extent possible, Owner shall designate a staging area so as not to interfere with the normal functioning of the facility. Location of gates and fencing shall be approved in advance with Owner and at Contractor's expense.

4. Parking areas shall be reviewed and approved by Owner in advance. No parking is to occur under the drip line of trees or in areas that could otherwise be damaged.

E. All of the above shall be observed and complied with by the Contractor and all workers on the Site. Failure to follow these directives could result in individual(s) being suspended or removed from the work force at the discretion of the Owner.

PW1320-A




PAGE 3 of 3

The same rules and regulations shall apply equally to delivery personnel, inspectors, consultants, and other visitors to the Site.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

Not Used


Not Used

END OF DOCUMENT

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 01 41 00

PAGE 1 of 2

DOCUMENT 01 41 00

REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 – GENERAL



A. General Conditions, including, without limitation, Obtaining of Permits and Licenses and Work to Comply with All Applicable Regulations;

B. Special Conditions; and

C. Quality Control.

1.02 DESCRIPTION:

This section covers the general requirements for regulatory requirements pertaining to the Work and is supplementary to all other regulatory requirements mentioned or referenced elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES:

A. PERMITS:The Contractor is responsible for all required permits and for all applicable permit fees. The Contractor shall obtain the building permit for the project from the City of Stockton’s Permit Center. An encroachment permit will be required for any construction equipment storage on a public street or storage unit parking on a public street.

B. All statutes, ordinances, laws, rules, codes, regulations, standards, and the lawful orders of all public authorities having jurisdiction of the Work, are hereby incorporated into these Contract Documents as if repeated in full herein and are intended to be included in any reference to Code or Building Code, unless otherwise specified, including, without limitation, the references in the list below. Contractor shall make available at the Site copies of all the listed documents applicable to the Work as the Owner and/or Architect may request, including, without limitation, applicable portions of the California Code of Regulations ("CCR").

C. This Project shall be governed by applicable regulations, including, without limitation, the State of California ‘s Administrative Regulations within , Chapter 4, Part 1, Title 24, CCR, and the most current version on the date the bids are opened and as it pertains to construction including, without limitation:



CITY OF STOCKTON REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 01 41 00 PAGE 2 of 2

1. Test and testing laboratory per Section 4-335 (Owner shall pay for the testing laboratory.)

2. Special inspections per Section 4-333(c). 3. Duties of the Architect & Engineers shall be per Section 4-333(a) and 4-

341. 4. Duties of the Contractor shall be per Section 4-343.

Contractor shall keep and make available a copy of Part 1 and 2 of the most current version of Title 24 California Building Codes at the Site during construction.

D. Items of deferred approval shall be clearly marked on the first sheet of the

Architect’s and/or Engineer's approved Drawings. All items later submitted for approval shall be per Title 24 requirements. 1. Building Standards Administrative Code, Part 1, Title 24, CCR 2. California Building Code (CBC), Part 2, Title 24, CCR; (International

Building Code and California Amendments). 3. California Electrical Code (CEC), Part 3, Title 24, CCR; (National

Electrical Code and California Amendments). 4. California Mechanical Code (CMC), Part 4, Title 24, CCR; (Uniform

Mechanical Code and California Amendments). 5. California Plumbing Code (CPC), Part 5, Title 24, CCR; (Uniform

Plumbing Code and California Amendments). 6. California Fire Code (CFC), Part 9, Title 24, CCR; (International Fire

Code and California Amendments). 7. California Referenced Standards Code, Part 12, Title 24, CCR. 8. California Division of Occupational Safety and Health “Cal/OSHA”, Title 8,

CCR.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 – EXECUTION Not Used

END OF DOCUMENT



CITY OF STOCKTON ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMSPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 01 42 13

PAGE 1 of 3

SECTION 01 42 13

ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

PART 1 – GENERAL



A. General Conditions including without limitation, Definitions;


1.02 DOCUMENT INCLUDES:

A. Abbreviations used throughout the Contract Documents.

B. Reference to a technical society, organization, or body is by abbreviation, as follows:1. AA Aluminum Association2. AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association3. AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation

Officials

4. ABPA Acoustical and Board Products Association5. ACI American Concrete Institute6. AGA American Gas Association

7. AGC Associated General Contractors8. AHC Architectural Hardware Consultant9. AI Asphalt Institute

10. AIA American Institute of Architects11. AIEE American Institute of Electrical Engineers12. AISC American Institute of Steel Construction

13. AISI American Iron and Steel Institute14. AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association15. ANSI American National Standards Institute

16. APA American Plywood Association17. ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute18. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air

Conditioning Engineers

19. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers20. ASSE American Society of Structural Engineers

PW1320-A




PAGE 2 of 3

21. ASTM American Society of Testing and Materials

22. AWPB American Wood Preservers Bureau23. AWPI American Wood preservers Institute24. AWS American Welding Society

25. AWSC American Welding Society Code26. AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute27. AWWA American Water Works Association

28. BIA Brick Institute of America29. CCR California Code of Regulations30. CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute

31. CMG California Masonry Guild32. CRA California Redwood Association33. CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute

34. CS Commercial Standards35. CSI Construction Specifications Institute36. CTI Cooling Tower Institute

37. FGMA Flat Glass Manufacturer’s Association38. FIA Factory Insurance Association39. FM Factory Mutual

40. FS Federal Specification41. FTI Facing Title Institute42. GA Gypsum Association

43. ICC International Code Council44. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers45. IES Illumination Engineering Society

46. LIA Lead Industries Association47. MIA Marble Institute of America48. MLMA Metal Lath Manufacturers Association

49. MS Military Specifications50. NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers51. NBHA National Builders Hardware Association

52. NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters53. NBS National Bureau of Standards54. NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association

55. NEC National Electrical Code56. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association

PW1320-A




PAGE 3 of 3

57. NFPA National Fire Protection Association/National Forest Products Association

58. NMWIA National Mineral Wool Insulation Association59. NTMA National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association60. NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturer’s Association

61. ORS Office of Regulatory Services (California)62. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act63. PCI Precast Concrete Institute

64. PCA Portland Cement Association65. PDCA Painting and Decorating Contractors of America66. PDI Plumbing Drainage Institute

67. PEI Porcelain Enamel Institute68. PG&E Pacific Gas & Electric Company69. PS Product Standards

70. SDI Steel Door Institute; Steel Deck Institute71. SJI Steel Joist Institute72. SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council

73. TCA Tile Council of America74. TPI Truss Plate Institute75. UBC Uniform Building Code

76. UL Underwriters Laboratories Code77. UMC Uniform Mechanical Code78. USDA United States Department of Agriculture

79. VI Vermiculite Institute80. WCLA West Coast Lumberman’s Association81. WCLB West Coast Lumber Bureau

82. WEUSER Western Electric Utilities Service Engineering Requirements83. WIC Woodwork Institute of California84. WPOA Western Plumbing Officials Association

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

Not Used


Not Used

END OF DOCUMENT

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON DEFINITIONSPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 01 42 16

PAGE 1 of 2

SECTION 01 42 16

DEFINITIONS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS AND PROVISION


A. General Conditions including without limitation, Definitions;


1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or Federal Standards, Contractor shall comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified in the Contract Documents, or are required by applicable codes.

B. Contractor shall conform to current reference standard publication date in effect on the date of bid opening.

C. Contractor shall obtain copies of standards unless specifically required not to by the Contract Documents.

D. Contractor shall maintain a copy of all standards at jobsite during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific Work, until final completion, unless specifically required not to by the Contract Documents.

E. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, Contractor shall request clarification from the Owner and / or the Architect before proceeding.

F. The contractual relationship of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered from the contractual relationship as indicated in the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any referenced document.

G. Governing Codes shall be as shown in the Contract Documents including, without limitation, the Specifications.

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON DEFINITIONSPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 01 42 16

PAGE 2 of 2

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

Not Used


Not Used

END OF DOCUMENT

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON REFERENCE STANDARDSPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 01 42 19

PAGE 1 of 13

SECTION 01 42 19

REFERENCE STANDARDS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SCHEDULE OF REFERENCES:

The following information is intended only for the general assistance of the Contractor, and the District does not represent that all of the information is current. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to verify the correct information for each of the entities listed.

AA Aluminum Association1525 Wilson Blvd., Suite 600Arlington, VA 22209www.aluminum.org

(703) 358-2960

AABC Associated Air Balance Council1518 K Street, NW, Suite 503Washington, DC 20005www.aabchq.com

(202) 737-0202

AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association1827 Walden Office Sq., Suite 550Schaumburg, IL 60173-4268www.aamanet.org

(847) 303-5664

AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials444 N Capitol St. NW - Suite 249Washington, DC 20001www.transportation.org

(202) 624-5800

AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and ColoristsP.O. Box 12215One Davis DriveResearch Triangle Park, NC 27709 2215www.aatcc.org

(919) 549-8141

ACA American Coatings Association1500 Rhode Island Ave., NWWashington DC, 20005www.paint.org

(202) 462-6272

ACI American Concrete Institute38800 Country Club Dr.Farmington Hills, MI 48331-3439www.aci-int.org

(248) 848-3700

ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association8445 Freeport Parkway, Suite 350Irving, TX 75063-2595www.concrete-pipe.org

(972) 506-7216

PW1320-A




PAGE 2 of 13

ADC Air Diffusion Council1901 N. Roselle Road, Suite 800Schaumburg, Illinois 60195www.flexibleduct.org

(847) 706-6750

AF&PA American Forest and Paper Association1111 Nineteenth Street, NW, Suite 800Washington, DC 20036www.afandpa.org

(202) 463-2700

AGA American Gas Association400 North Capitol Street, NWWashington, DC 20001www.aga.org

(202) 824-7000

AGC Associate General Contractors of America2300 Wilson Blvd., Suite 400Arlington, VA 22201www.agc.org

(703) 548-3118

AHA American Hardboard Association1210 West Northwest HighwayPalatine, IL 60067domensino.com/AHA/default.htm

(847) 934-8800

AI Asphalt Institute2696 Research Park DriveLexington, KY 40511-8480www.asphaltinstitute.org

(859) 288-4960

AIA The American Institute of Architects1735 New York Ave., NWWashington, DC 20006-5292www.aia.org

(202) 626-7300

AISC American Institute of Steel ConstructionOne East Wacker Drive Suite 700Chicago, IL 60601-1802www.aisc.org

(312) 670.2400

AIA American Insurance Association(formerly the National Board of Fire Underwriters)2101 L Street, NW, Suite 400Washington, DC 20037www.aiadc.org

(202) 828-7100

AISI American Iron and Steel Institute25 Massachusetts Ave., NW, Suite 800Washington, DC 20001www.steel.org

(202) 452.7100

AITC American Institute of Timber Construction7012 S. Revere Parkway Suite 140Centennial, CO 80112www.aitc-glulam.org

(303) 792.9559

PW1320-A




PAGE 3 of 13

ALI Associated Laboratories, Inc.P.O. Box 152837Dallas, TX 75315www.assoc-labs.com

(214) 565-0593

ALSC American Lumber Standards Committee, Inc.P.O. Box 210Germantown, MD 20875www.alsc.org

(301) 972-1700

AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.30 W. University DriveArlington Heights, IL 60004www.amca.org

(847) 394-0150

ANLA American Nursery & Landscape Association1200 G Street NW, Suite 800Washington, DC 20005www.anla.org

(202) 789-2900

ANSI American National Standards Institute1899 L Street, NW, 11th FloorWashington, DC, 20036www.ansi.org

(202) 293.8020

APA APA-The Engineered Wood Association7011 S. 19th StreetTacoma, WA 98466-5333www.apawood.org

(253) 565-6600

APA Architectural Precast Association6710 Winkler Road, Suite 8Fort Myers, Florida 33919www.archprecast.org

(239) 454-6989

ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute4100 N. Fairfax Drive, Suite 200Arlington, VA 22203www.lightindustries.com/ARI

(703) 524-8800

ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers AssociationPublic Information Department750 National Press Building529 14th Street, NWWashington, DC 20045www.asphaltroofing.org

(202) 591-2450

ASA The Acoustical Society of AmericaASA Office ManagerSuite 1NO12 Huntington QuadrangleMelville, NY 11747-4502http://asa.aip.org

(516) 576-2360

ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers1801 Alexander Bell DriveReston, VA 20191www.asce.org

(800) 548-2723(703) 295-6300

PW1320-A




PAGE 4 of 13

ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers1791 Tullie Circle, NEAtlanta, GA 30329-2305www.ashrae.org

(800) 527-4723(404) 636-8400

ASLA American Society of Landscape Architects636 Eye Street, NWWashington, DC 20001-3736www.asla.org

(202) 898-2444

ASME American Society of Mechanical EngineersThree Park AvenueNew York, NY 10016-5990www.asme.org

(800) 434-2763

ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers2980 S River Rd.Des Plaines, IL 60018http://aspe.org

(847) 296-0002

ASQ American Society for QualityP.O. Box 3005Milwaukee, WI 53201-3005or600 North Plankinton AvenueMilwaukee, WI 53203http://asq.org

(800) 248-1946(414) 272-8575

ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering901 Canterbury, Suite AWestlake, Ohio 44145www.asse-plumbing.org

(440) 835-3040

ASTM ASTM International100 Barr Harbor DrivePO Box C700West Conshohocken, PA, 19428-2959www.astm.org

(610) 832-9500

AWCI Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry513 West Broad Street, Suite 210Falls Church, VA 22046www.awci.org

(703) 538-1600

AWPA American Wood Protection AssociationP.O. Box 361784Birmingham, AL 35236-1784www.awpa.com

(205) 733-4077

AWPI American Wood Preservers Institute2750 Prosperity Ave.Suite 550Fairfax, VA 22031-4312www.arcat.com

(800) 356-AWPI(703) 204-0500

PW1320-A




PAGE 5 of 13

AWS American Welding Society8669 Doral Boulevard, Suite 130Doral, Florida 33166www.aws.org

800/443-9353 305/443-9353

AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute46179 Westlake Drive, Suite 120Potomac Falls, VA 20165-5874www.awinet.org

571/323-3636

AWWA American Water Works Association6666 West Quincy AvenueDenver, CO 80235www.awwa.org

800/926-7337303/794 7711

BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association355 Lexington Avenue, 15th floorNew York, NY 10017www.buildershardware.com

212/297-2122

BIA The Brick Industry Association1850 Centennial Park Drive, Suite 301Reston, VA 20191www.gobrick.com

703/620-0010

CGA Compressed Gas Association14501 George Carter Way, Suite 103Chantilly VA 20151-2923www.cganet.com

703/788-2700

CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association1010 Jorie Blvd, Suite 30Oak Brook, IL 60523www.cisca.org

630/584-1919

CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute1064 Delaware Avenue SEAtlanta, GA 30316www.cispi.org

404/622-0073

CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute10015 Old Columbia Road, Suite B-215Columbia, MD 21046www.associationsites.com/main-pub.cfm?usr=clfma

410/290-6267

CPA Composite Panel Association19465 Deerfield Avenue, Suite 306Leesburg, VA 20176www.compositepanel.org

703/724-1128

CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission4330 East West HighwayBethesda, MD 20814www.cpsc.gov

301/504-7923800/638-2772

CRA California Redwood Association405 Enfrente Drive, Suite 200Novato, CA 94949www.calredwood.org

415/382-0662

PW1320-A




PAGE 6 of 13

CRI Carpet and Rug InstituteP.O. Box 2048Dalton, Georgia 30722-2048www.carpet-rug.org

706/278-3176

CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute933 N. Plum Grove RoadSchaumburg, IL 60173 4758www.crsi.org

847/517-1200

CSI The Construction Specifications Institute110 South Union Street, Suite 100Alexandria VA 22314www.csinet.org

800/689-2900

CTIOA Ceramic Tile Institute of America12061 Jefferson Blvd.Culver City, CA 90230-6219www.ctioa.org

310/574-7800

DHI Door and Hardware Institute(formerly National Builders Hardware Association)14150 Newbrook Dr.Chantilly, VA 20151www.dhi.org

703/222-2010

DIPRA Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association2000 2nd Avenue, SouthSuite 429Birmingham, AL 35233www.dipra.org

205/402-8700

DOC U.S. Department of Commerce1401 Constitution Ave., NWWashington, D.C. 20230www.commerce.gov

202/482-2000

DOT U.S. Department of Transportation1200 New Jersey Avenue, SEWashington, DC 20590www.dot.gov

855/368-4200

EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.25 North BroadwayTarrytown, NY 10591www.ejma.org

914/332-0040

EPA Environmental Protection AgencyAriel Rios Building1200 Pennsylvania Avenue, N.W.Washington, DC 20460www.epa.gov

202/272-0167

FCICA Floor Covering Installation Contractors Association7439 Millwood DriveWest Bloomfield, MI 48322www.fcica.com

248/661-5015877/TO-FCICA

PW1320-A




PAGE 7 of 13

FM Global Factory Mutual Insurance CompanyMary BreighnerGlobal Practice LeaderEducation, Public Entities, Health CareFM Global9 Woodcrest CourtCincinnati, OH 45246www.fmglobal.com

513/742-9516

FS General Services Administration (GSA) Index of Federal Specifications, Standards and Commercial Item Descriptions470 East L’Enfant Plaza, SW, Suite 8100Washington, DC 20407www.gsa.gov

202/619-8925

GA The Gypsum Association6525 Belcrest Road, Suite 480Hyattsville, MD 20782www.gypsum.org

301/277-8686

GANA Glass Association of North America800 SW Jackson St., Suite 1500Topeka, KS 66612-1200www.glasswebsite.com

785/271-0208

HMA Hardwood Manufacturers Association665 Rodi Road, Suite 305Pittsburgh, PA 15235http://hmamembers.org

412/244-0440

HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association1825 Michael Faraday DriveReston, Virginia 20190www.hpva.org

703/435-2900

IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials(formerly the Western Plumbing Officials Association)4755 E. Philadelphia St.Ontario, CA 91761www.iapmo.org

909/472-4100

ICC International Code Council500 New Jersey Avenue, NW, 6th FloorWashington, DC 20001www.iccsafe.org

888/422-7233

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers3 Park Avenue, 17th FloorNew York, NY 10016-5997www.ieee.org

212/419-7900

IES Illuminating Engineering Society120 Wall Street, Floor 17New York, NY 10005-4001www.ies.org

212/248-5000

PW1320-A




PAGE 8 of 13

ITRK Intertek Testing Services3933 US Route 11Cortland, NY 13045www.intertek.com

607/753-6711

MCAA Mechanical Contractors Association of America1385 Piccard DriveRockville, MD 20850www.mcaa.org

301/869-5800

MIA Marble Institute of America28901 Clemens Rd, Ste 100Cleveland, OH 44145www.marble-institute.com

440/250-9222

MMPA(formerly WMMPA)

Moulding & Millwork Producers Association(formerly Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association)507 First StreetWoodland, CA 95695www.wmmpa.com

530/661-9591800/550-7889

MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) of the Valve and Fittings Industry127 Park Street, NEVienna, VA 22180-4602http://mss-hq.org

703/281-6613

NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers800 Roosevelt Rd. Bldg. C, Suite 312Glen Ellyn, IL 60137www.naamm.org

630/942-6591

NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association44 Canal Center Plaza, Suite 310Alexandria, VA 22314www.naima.org

703/684-0084

NAPA National Asphalt Pavement Association5100 Forbes Blvd.Lanham, MD USA 20706-4407www.asphaltpavement.org

888/468-6499301/731-4748

NCSPA National Corrugated SteelPipe Association14070 Proton Road, Suite 100 LB9Dallas, TX 75244www.ncspa.org

972/850-1907

NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association13750 Sunrise Valley DriveHerndon, VA 20171-4662www.ncma.org

703/713-1900

NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau8575 Grovemont CircleGaithersburg, MD 20877www.nebb.org

301/977-3698

PW1320-A




PAGE 9 of 13

NECA National Electrical Contractors Association3 Bethesda Metro Center, Suite 1100Bethesda, MD 20814www.necanet.org

301/657-3110

National Electrical Manufacturers Association1300 North 17th Street, Suite 1752Rosslyn, Virginia 22209www.nema.org

703/841-3200

NEII National Elevator Industry, Inc.1677 County Route 64P.O. Box 838Salem, New York 12865-0838www.neii.org

518/854-3100

NFPA National Fire Protection Association1 Batterymarch ParkQuincy, MassachusettsUSA 02169-7471www.nfpa.org

617/770-3000

NHLA National Hardwood Lumber AssociationPO Box 34518Memphis, TN 38184www.nhla.com

901/377-1818

NIA National Insulation Association12100 Sunset Hills Road, Suite 330Reston, VA 20190www.insulation.org

703/464-6422

NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association10255 W. Higgins Road, Suite 600Rosemont, IL 60018-5607www.nrca.net

847/299-9070

NSF NSF InternationalP.O. Box 130140789 N. Dixboro RoadAnn Arbor, MI 48113-0140, USAwww.nsf.org

800/673-6275734/769-8010

NTMA National Terrazzo and Mosaic AssociationPO Box 2605Fredericksburg, TX 78624www.ntma.com

800/323-9736

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health ActU.S. Department of LaborOccupational Safety & Health Administration200 Constitution Ave., NWWashington, D.C. 20210www.osha.gov

800/321-OSHA (6742)

PW1320-A




PAGE 10 of 13

PCA Portland Cement Association5420 Old Orchard RoadSkokie, IL 60077or500 New Jersey Ave., N.W. 7th FloorWashington, D.C. 20001www.cement.org

847/966-6200202/408-9494

PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute200 W. Adams St. #2100Chicago, IL 60606www.pci.org

312/786-0300

PDCA Painting and Decorating Contractors of America2316 Millpark Drive, Ste 220Maryland Heights, MO 63043www.pdca.com

800/332-PDCA (7322)314/514-7322

PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute800 Turnpike Street, Suite 300North Andover, MA 01845http://pdionline.org

978/557-0720800/589-8956

PEI Porcelain Enamel Institute, Inc.P.O. Box 920220Norcross, GA 30010www.porcelainenamel.com

770/676-9366

PG&E Pacific Gas & Electric Companywww.pge.com

800/743-5000

PLANET Professional Landcare Network950 Herndon Parkway, Suite 450Herndon, Virginia 20170www.landcarenetwork.org

703/736-9666800/395-2522703/736-9668

RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute115 Broad Street, Suite 201La Grange GA 30240www.rfci.com

706/882-3833

RIS Redwood Inspection Service818 Grayson Road, Suite 201Pleasant Hill, CA 94523www.redwoodinspection.com

925/935-1499

SDI Steel Deck InstituteP.O. Box 25Fox River Grove, IL 60021www.sdi.org

847/458-4647

SDI Steel Door Institute30200 Detroit RoadWestlake, Ohio 44145www.steeldoor.org

440/899-0010

PW1320-A




PAGE 11 of 13

SJI Steel Joist Institute234 W. Cheves StreetFlorence, SC 29501http://steeljoist.org

843/407-4091

SMA Stucco Manufacturers Association500 East Yale LoopIrvine, CA 92614www.stuccomfgassoc.com

949/387.7611

SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association4201 Lafayette Center DriveChantilly, Virginia 20151-1219www.smacna.org

703/803-2980

SPI SPI: The Plastics Industry Trade Association, Inc.1667 K St., NW, Suite 1000Washington, DC 20006www.plasticsindustry.org

202/974-5200

SSPC Society for Protective Coatings(formerly the Steel Structures Painting Council)40 24th St 6th FlPittsburgh, PA 15222www.sspc.org

412/281-2331877/281-7772

TCA The Tile Council of North America100 Clemson Research Blvd.Anderson, SC 29625www.tcnatile.com

864/646-8453

TPI Truss Plate Institute218 North Lee Street, Suite 312Alexandria, VA 22314www.tpinst.org

703/683-1010

TPI Turfgrass Producers International2 East Main StreetEast Dundee, IL 60118www.turfgrasssod.org

800/405-8873847/649-5555

TCIA Tree Care Industry Association(formerly the National Arborist Association)136 Harvey Road, Suite 101Londonderry, NH 03053www.tcia.org

800/733-2622

TVI The Vermiculite Institutec/o The Schundler Company150 Whitman AvenueEdison, NJ. 08817www.vermiculiteinstitute.org

732/287-2244

UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc.333 Pfingsten RoadNorthbrook, IL 60062-2096www.ul.com

847/272-8800877/854-3577

PW1320-A




PAGE 12 of 13

UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association2711 LBJ Freeway, Suite 1000Dallas, TX 75234www.uni-bell.org

972/243-3902

USDA U.S. Department of Agriculture1400 Independence Ave., S.W.Washington, DC 20250www.usda.gov

202/720-2791

WA Wallcoverings Association401 North Michigan AvenueSuite 2200Chicago, IL 60611www.wallcoverings.org

312/321-5166

WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection BureauP.O. Box 23145Portland, OR 97281or6980 S.W. VarnsTigard, OR 97223www.wclib.org

503/639-0651

WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association355 Lexington Avenue 15th FloorNew York, New York 10017www.wcmanet.org

212/297-2122

WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association401 N. Michigan Avenue, Suite 2200Chicago, IL 60611or2025 M Street, NW, Ste. 800Washington, D.C. 20036-3309www.wdma.com

312/321-6802202/367-1157

WI Woodwork InstituteP.O. Box 980247West Sacramento, CA 95798www.wicnet.org

916/372-9943

WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute942 Main StreetHartford, CT 06103www.wirereinforcementinstitute.org

860/240-9545

WWCA Western Wall & Ceiling Contractors Association1910 N. Lime St.Orange, California 92865www.wwcca.org

714/221-5520

WWPA Western Wood Products Association522 SW Fifth Ave., Suite 500Portland, OR 97204-2122www2.wwpa.org

503/224-3930

PW1320-A




PAGE 13 of 13

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

Not Used


Not Used

END OF DOCUMENT

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT QUALIFICATIONSPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 01 43 41

PAGE 1 of 4

SECTION 01 43 00

MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT QUALIFICATIONS

PART 1 – GENERAL



A. General Conditions, including, without limitation, Purchase of Materials and Equipment;


C. Imported Materials Certification.

1.02 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

A. Only items approved by the Owner and/or Architect shall be used.

B. Contractor shall submit lists of products and other product information in accordance with the Contract Documents, including, without limitation, the provisions regarding the submittals.

1.03 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT COLORS

A. The Owner and/or Architect will provide a schedule of colors.

B. No individual color selections will be made until after approval of all pertinent materials and equipment and after receipt of appropriate samples in accordance with the Contract Documents, including, without limitation, the provisions regarding the submittals.

C. Contractor shall request priority in writing for any item requiring advance ordering to maintain the approved Construction Schedule.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Contractor shall deliver manufactured materials in original packages, containers, or bundles (with seals unbroken), bearing name or identification mark of manufacturer.

B. Contractor shall deliver fabrications in as large assemblies as practicable; where specified as shop-primed or shop-finished, package or crate as required to preserve such priming or finish intact and free from abrasion.

PW1320-A




PAGE 2 of 4

C. Contractor shall store materials in such a manner as necessary to properly protect them from damage. Materials or equipment damaged by handling, weather, dirt, or from any other cause will not be accepted.

D. Materials are not acceptable that have been warehoused for long periods of time, stored or transported in improper environment, improperly packaged, inadequately labeled, poorly protected, excessively shipped, deviated from normal distribution pattern, or reassembled.

E. Contractor shall store material so as to cause no obstructions of sidewalks, roadways, and underground services. Contractor shall protect material and equipment furnished under Contract.

F. Contractor may store materials on Site with prior written approval by the Owner, all material shall remain under Contractor's control and Contractor shall remain liable for any damage to the materials. Should the Project Site not have storage area available, the Contractor shall provide for off-site storage at a bonded warehouse and with appropriate insurance coverage at no cost to Owner.

G. When any room in Project is used as a shop or storeroom, the Contractor shall be responsible for any repairs, patching, or cleaning necessary due to that use. Location of storage space shall be subject to prior written approval by Owner.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers listed in various sections of Contract Documents are names of those manufacturers that are believed to be capable of supplying one or more of items specified therein.

B. The listing of a manufacturer does not imply that every product of that manufacturer is acceptable as meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents.

2.02 FACILITIES AND EQUIPMENT

Contractor shall provide, install, maintain, and operate a complete and adequate facility for handling, the execution, disposal, and distribution of material and equipment as required for proper and timely performance of Work connected with Contract.

2.03 MATERIAL REFERENCE STANDARDS

Where material is specified solely by reference to “standard specifications” and if requested by Owner, Contractor shall submit for review data on actual material proposed to be incorporated into Work of Contract listing name and address of vendor, manufacturer, or producer, and trade or brand names of those materials, and data substantiating compliance with standard specifications.

PW1320-A




PAGE 3 of 4


3.01 WORKMANSHIP

A. Where not more specifically described in any other Contract Documents, workmanship shall conform to methods and operations of best standards and accepted practices of trade or trades involved and shall include items of fabrication, construction, or installation regularly furnished or required for completion (including finish and for successful operation, as intended).

B. Work shall be executed by tradespersons skilled in their respective lines of Work. When completed, parts shall have been durably and substantially built and present a neat appearance.

3.02 COORDINATION

A. Contractor shall coordinate installation of Work so as to not interfere with installation of others. Adjustment or rework because of Contractor’s failure to coordinate will be at no additional cost to Owner.

B. Contractor shall examine in-place work for readiness, completeness, fitness to be concealed or to receive other work, and in compliance with Contract Documents. Concealing or covering Work constitutes acceptance of additional cost which will result should in-place Work be found unsuitable for receiving other Work or otherwise deviating from the requirements of the Contract Documents.

3.03 COMPLETENESS

Contractor shall provide all portions of the Work, unless clearly stated otherwise, installed complete and operational with all elements, accessories, anchorages, utility connections, etc., in manner to assure well-balanced performance, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and by Contract Documents. For example, electric water coolers require water, electricity, and drain services; roof drains require drain system; sinks fit within countertop, etc. Terms such as “installed complete,” “operable condition,” “for use intended,” “connected to all utilities,” “terminate with proper cap,” “adequately anchored,” “patch and refinish,” “to match similar,” should be assumed to apply in all cases, except where completeness of functional or operable condition is specifically stated as not required.

3.04 APPROVED INSTALLER OR APPLICATOR

Installation by a manufacturer’s approved installer or applicator is an understood part of Specifications and only approved installer or applicator is to provide on-site Work where specified manufacturer has on-going program of approving (i.e. certifying, bonding, re-warranting) installers or applicators. Newly established relationships between a manufacturer and an installer or applicator who does not have other approved applicator work in progress or completed is not approved for this Project.

PW1320-A




PAGE 4 of 4

3.05 MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS

All installations shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations and specific written directions of manufacturer's representative. Should Contract Documents differ from recommendations of manufacturer or directions of his representative, Contractor shall analyze differences, make recommendations to the Owner and the Architect in writing, and shall not proceed until interpretation or clarification has been issued by the Owner and/or the Architect.

END OF DOCUMENT

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON QUALITY CONTROLPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 01 45 00

PAGE 1 of 3

SECTION 01 45 00

QUALITY CONTROL

PART 1 – GENERAL



A. General Conditions, including, without limitation, Inspector, Inspections and Tests, Uncovering of Work and Non-conforming of Work and Correction of Work;


1.02 RELATED CODES:

A. The Work is governed by requirements of Title 24, California Code of Regulations (“CCR”), and the Contractor shall keep a copy of these available at the job Site for ready reference during construction.

1.03 OBSERVATION AND SUPERVISION:

A. The Owner and Architect or their appointed representatives will review the Work and the Contractor shall provide facilities and access to the Work at all times as required to facilitate this review. Administration by the Architect and any consulting Structural Engineer will be in accordance with applicable regulations, including, without limitation, CCR, Part 1, Title 24, Section 4-341.

B. One or more Building Department Inspector(s), herein referred to as Inspector will observe the work in accordance with CCR, Part 1, Title 24, Sections 4-333(b) and 4-342:1. The Inspector shall have access to the Work wherever it is in preparation

or progress for ascertaining that the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents and all applicable code sections. The Contractor shall provide facilities and access as required and shall provide assistance for sampling or measuring materials.

2. The Inspector will notify the Owner and Architect and call the attention of the Contractor to any observed failure of Work or material to conform to Contract Documents.

3. The Inspector shall observe and monitor all testing and inspection activities required.

C. The Contractor shall conform with all applicable laws as indicated in the Contract Documents, including, without limitation, to CCR, Part 1, Title 24, Section 4-343. The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work and maintain a competent superintendent on the job who is authorized to act in all matters pertaining to the Work. The Contractor's superintendent shall also inspect all materials, as they

PW1320-A




PAGE 2 of 3

arrive, for compliance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall reject defective Work or materials immediately upon delivery or failure of the Work or material to comply with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall submit verified reports as indicated in the Contract Documents, including, without limitation, the Specifications and as required by Part 1, Title 24, Section 4-336.

1.04 TESTING AGENCIES:

A. Testing agencies and tests shall be in conformance with the General Documents and the requirements of Part 1, Title 24, Section 4- 335.

B. Testing and inspection in connection with earthwork shall be under the direction of the Owner's consulting soils engineer, if any, referred to hereinafter as the "Soils Engineer".

C. Testing and inspection of construction materials and workmanship shall be performed by a qualified laboratory, referred to hereinafter as the "Testing Laboratory." The Testing Laboratory shall be under direction of an engineer registered in the State of California, shall conform to requirements of ASTM E329, and shall be employed by or in contract with the Owner.

1.05 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS:

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Owner and Inspector of all required tests and inspections. Contractor shall notify the Owner and Inspector at least seventy-two hours (72) hours in advance of performing any Work requiring testing or inspection.

B. The Contractor shall provide access to Work to be tested and furnish incidental labor, equipment, and facilities to facilitate all inspections and tests.

C. The Owner will pay for first inspections and tests required by the “CCR”, and other inspections or tests that the Owner and/or the Architect may direct to have made, including the following principal items:1. Tests and observations for earthwork and paving.2. Tests for concrete mix designs, including tests of trial batches.3. Tests and inspections for structural steel work.4. Field tests for framing lumber moisture content.5. Additional tests directed by the Owner that establish that materials and

installation comply with the Contract Documents.6. Test and observation of welding and expansion anchors.

D. The Owner may at its discretion, pay and back charge the Contractor for:1. Retests or re-inspections, if required, and tests or inspections required

due to Contractor error or lack of required identifications of material.2. Uncovering of work in accordance with Contract Documents.3. Testing done on weekends, holidays, and overtime will be chargeable to

the Contractor for the overtime portion.4. Testing done off Site.

PW1320-A




PAGE 3 of 3

E. Testing and inspection reports and certifications:1. If initially received by Contractor, Contractor shall provide to each of the

following a copy of the agency or laboratory report of each test or inspection or certification.a. The Owner;b. The Construction Manager, if any;c. The Architect;d. The Consulting Engineer, if any;e. Other engineers on the Project, as appropriate;f. The Inspector; andg. The Contractor.

2. When the test or inspection is one required by the CCR, a copy of the report shall also be provided to the DSA.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 TYPE OF TEST AND INSPECTIONS:

A. Provide tests and inspections as described on the Tests and Inspections form recorded with the issuance of the permit for construciton.


Not Used

END OF DOCUMENT

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLSPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 01 50 00

PAGE 1 of 6

SECTION 01 50 00

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 – GENERAL





C. Site Standards

1.02 TEMPORARY UTILITIES:

A. Electric Power and Lighting1. Electrical power shall be made available to the Contractor by the Owner

via existing on-site sources at no cost to the Contractor. Contractor shall be responsible for receiving power from Owner and distributing as required to accomplish the scope of work.

2. Contractor shall verify characteristics of power available from Owner on the Site. Contractor shall take all actions required to make connections to power of higher voltage or different phases of current are provided. Contractor shall be fully responsible for providing that service.

3. Contractor shall furnish, wire for, install, and maintain temporary electrical lights wherever it is necessary to provide illumination for the proper performance and/or observation of the Work: a minimum of 20 foot-candles for rough work and 50 foot-candles for finish work shall be provided.

4. Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining existing lighting levels in the project vicinity should temporary outages or service interruptions occur.

B. Heat and Ventilation: Not Applicable.

C. Water1. Water shall be made available to the Contractor by the Owner via existing

on-site sources at no cost to the Contractor. Contractor shall be responsible for receiving water from Owner and distributing as required to accomplish the scope of work.

2. Contractor shall use backflow preventers on water lines at point of connection to Owner’s water supply. Backflow preventers shall comply with requirements of California Plumbing Code.

PW1320-A




PAGE 2 of 6

3. Contractor shall make potable water available for human consumption. This shall be available to all of Contractor’s workers, Subcontractor’s workers, Owner’s Representative, and visitors to this project.

D. Sanitary Facilities1. Sanitary Facilities shall be provided by the Contractor at his cost for use

by his employees and subcontractors. Contractor shall be required to provide maintenance to these facilities during the period of work.

2. Use of Owner’s toilet facilities in the Work area under construction shall not be permitted except by consent of the Owner’s Representative.

3. Separate sanitary facilities shall be provided by the Contractor for the City of Stockton Corporation yard employees. See Section 01 52 13 for details.

E. Telephone Service1. Contractor shall arrange with local telephone service company for

telephone service for the performance of the Work. Contractor shall, at a minimum, provide in its field office one line for telephone and one line for high speed internet access.

2. Contractor shall pay the costs for telephone and internet lines installation, maintenance, service, and removal.

F. Fire Protection:1. Contractor shall provide and maintain fire extinguishers and other

equipment for fire protection. Such equipment shall be designated for use for fire protection only and shall comply with all requirements of the California Fire Code and the State Fire Marshall and/or its designee.

2. Where on-site welding and burning of steel is unavoidable, Contractor shall provide protection for adjacent surfaces.

3. Contractor shall provide full compliance with Cal/OSHA requirements.

G. Trash Removal and Construction Waste/Packaging:1. Contractor shall provide trash removal on a timely basis. Contractor shall

provide specific and independent trash / debris collection receptacles and not have access to Owner’s receptacles. Contractor shall provide special receptacles for recyclable trash and debris throughout the course of the construction process as available from the local waste management company. One (1) dumpster can be placed next to each building at a location to be designated by the Owner. All other dumpsters shall be a separate location onsite to be determined by the Owner. See also provisions of section 01 50 13: Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

H. Temporary Facilities:1. Refer to Section 01 52 13: Field Office.

I. First Aid:1. Contractor shall provide and maintain Personnel Protection Equipment

and make available to all staff and visitors.

PW1320-A




PAGE 3 of 6

2. Contractor shall provide and maintain a First Aid Kit and make available to all staff and visitors.

3. Contractor shall comply with all requirements of Cal/OSHA.

1.03 CONSTRUCTION AIDS:

A. Plant and Equipment:1. Contractor shall furnish, operate, and maintain a complete plant for

fabricating, handling, conveying, installing, and erecting materials and equipment; and for conveyances for transporting workmen. Include elevators, hoists, debris chutes, and other equipment, tools, and appliances necessary for performance of the Work.

2. Contractor shall maintain plant and equipment in safe and efficient operating condition. Damages due to defective plant and equipment, and uses made thereof, shall be repaired by Contractor at no expense to the Owner.

B. None of the Owner’s tools and equipment shall be used by Contractor for any reason.

1.04 BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES:

A. Contractor shall obtain the Owner's written permission for locations and types of temporary barriers and enclosures, including fire-rated materials proposed for use, prior to their installation.

B. Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary enclosures to prevent public entry and to protect persons using other buildings and portions of the Site and/or Premises, the public, and workers. Contractor shall also protect the Work and existing facilities from the elements, and adjacent construction and improvements, persons, and trees and plants from damage and injury from demolition and construction operations.

C. Contractor shall provide site access to existing facilities for persons using other buildings and portions of the Site, the public, and for deliveries and other services and activities.

D. Tree and Plant Protection:1. Contractor shall preserve and protect existing trees and plants on the

Premises that are not designated or required to be removed, and those adjacent to the Premises.

2. Contractor shall provide barriers to a minimum height of 4'-0" around drip line of each tree and plant or around each group of trees and plants, as applicable, in the proximity of demolition and construction operations.

3. Contractor shall not park trucks, store materials, perform Work or cross over landscaped areas. Contractor shall not dispose of paint thinners, water from cleaning, plastering or concrete operations, or other deleterious materials in landscaped areas, storm drain systems, or

PW1320-A




PAGE 4 of 6

sewers. Plant materials damaged as a result of the performance of the Work shall, at the option of the Owner and at Contractor's expense, either be replaced with new plant materials equal in size to those damaged or by payment of an amount representing the value of the damaged materials as determined by the Owner.

4. Contractor shall remove soil that has been contaminated during the performance of the Work by oil, solvents, and other materials which could be harmful to trees and plants, and replace with good soil, at Contractor's expense.

5. Excavation around Trees:a. Excavation within drip lines of trees shall be done only where

absolutely necessary and with written permission from the Owner.b. Where trenching for utilities is required within drip lines, tunneling

under and around roots shall be by hand digging and shall be approved by the Owner. Main lateral roots and taproots shall not be cut. All roots 2 inches in diameter and larger shall be tunneled under and heavily wrapped with wet burlap so as to prevent scarring or excessive drying. Smaller roots that interfere with installation of new work may be cut with prior approval by the Owner. Roots must first be cut with a Vermeer, or equivalent, root cutter prior to any trenching.

c. Where excavation for new construction is required within drip line of trees, hand excavation shall be employed to minimize damage to root system. Roots shall be relocated in backfill areas wherever possible. If encountered immediately adjacent to location of new construction, roots shall be cut approximately 6 inches back from new construction.

d. Approved excavations shall be carefully backfilled with the excavated materials approved for backfilling. Backfill shall conform to adjacent grades without dips, sunken areas, humps, or other surface irregularities. Do not use mechanical equipment to compact backfill. Tamp carefully using hand tools, refilling and tamping until Final Acceptance as necessary to offset settlement.

e. Exposed roots shall not be allowed to dry out before permanent backfill is placed. Temporary earth cover shall be provided, or roots shall be wrapped with four layers of wet, untreated burlap and temporarily supported and protected from damage until permanently relocated and covered with backfill.

f. Accidentally broken roots should be sawed cleanly 3 inches behind ragged end.

1.05 SECURITY:

The Contractor shall be responsible for project security for materials, tools, equipment, supplies, and completed and partially completed Work.

PW1320-A




PAGE 5 of 6

1.06 TEMPORARY CONTROLS:

A. Noise Control1. Contractor acknowledges that adjacent facilities may remain in operation

during all or a portion of the Work period, and it shall take all reasonable precautions to minimize noise as required by applicable laws and the Contract Documents.

2. Notice of proposed noisy operations, including without limitation, operation of pneumatic demolition tools, concrete saws, and other equipment, shall be submitted to the Owner a minimum of forty-eight (48) hours in advance of their performance.

B. Noise and Vibration1. Equipment and impact tools shall have intake and exhaust mufflers.2. Contractor shall cooperate with Owner to minimize and/or cease the use

of noisy and vibratory equipment if that equipment becomes objectionable by its longevity.

C. Dust and Dirt1. Contractor shall conduct demolition and construction operations to

minimize the generation of dust and dirt, and prevent dust and dirt from interfering with the progress of the Work and from accumulating in the Work and adjacent areas including, without limitation, occupied facilities.

2. Contractor shall periodically water exterior demolition and construction areas to minimize the generation of dust and dirt.

3. Contractor shall ensure that all hauling equipment and trucks carrying loads of soil or debris shall have their loads sprayed with water or covered with tarpaulins, and as otherwise required by local and state ordinance.

4. Contractor shall prevent dust and dirt from accumulating on walks, roadways, parking areas, and planting, and from washing into sewer and storm drain lines.

D. Water

Contractor shall not permit surface and subsurface water, and other liquids, to accumulate in or about the vicinity of the Premises. Should accumulation develop, Contractor shall control the water or other liquid, and suitably dispose of it by means of temporary pumps, piping, drainage lines, troughs, ditches, dams, or other methods.

E. Pollution1. No burning of refuse, debris, or other materials shall be permitted on or in

the vicinity of the Premises.2. Contractor shall comply with applicable regulatory requirements and anti-

pollution ordinances during the conduct of the Work including, without limitation, demolition, construction, and disposal operations.

PW1320-A




PAGE 6 of 6

F. Lighting1. If portable lights are used after dark, all light must be located so as not to

direct light into neighboring property.

G. Parking1. Parking locations for Contractor and sub-contractor employees and

company vehicles shall be designated by the Owner.

1.07 JOB SIGN(S):

A. Not Required for this project.

1.08 PUBLICITY RELEASES:

A. Contractor shall not release any information, story, photograph, plan, or drawing relating information about the Project to anyone, including press and other public communications medium, including, without limitation, on website(s).

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

Not Used


Not Used

END OF DOCUMENT

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSALPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 01 50 13

PAGE 1 of 6

SECTION 01 50 13

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

PART 1 – GENERAL





C. Division 01

D. Section 02 41 19: Selective Building Demolition


A. Administrative and procedural requirements for the following:1. Salvaging non-hazardous construction waste.2. Recycling non-hazardous construction waste.3. Disposing of non-hazardous construction waste.

B. City required form for waste management:1. See attached “Construction and Demolition (C&D) Debris Waste

Reduction Program Requirements” from the City of Stockton attached to the end of this section. This form is to be filled out by the contractor and submitted to the City of Stockton at or before the issuance of the building permit.

1.03 DEFINITIONS:

A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes all packaging materials used during product shipping or stored.

B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations.

C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse.

PW1320-A




PAGE 2 of 6

E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility.

F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work.

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:

A. General: Develop a waste management plan that results in end-of Project rates for salvage/recycling of fifty percent (50%) by weight (or by volume, but not a combination) of total waste generated by the Work.

1.05 SUBMITTALS:

A. Waste Management Plan: Submit waste management plan within 5 days from the date of mobilization but in no case after the start of demolition operations.

B. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit copies of report. Include the following information:1. Material category.2. Generation point of waste.3. Total quantity of waste in tons or cubic yards.4. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual, in tons or cubic

yards.5. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual, in tons or cubic

yards.6. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons or

cubic yards.7. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a

percentage of total waste.

C. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for final payment, submit copies of calculated end-of-Project rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated by the Work.

D. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.

E. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.

F. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

PW1320-A




PAGE 3 of 6

G. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

H. Qualification Data: For Waste Management Coordinator.

I. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered.

J. Submittal procedures and quantities are specified in Document 01 33 00.


A. Waste Management Coordinator Qualifications: LEED Accredited Professional by U.S. Green Building Council.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements. Review methods and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following:1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of

Waste Management Coordinator.2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste

and its disposition.3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify

availability of containers and bins needed to avoid delays.4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to

recycling and disposal facilities.5. Review waste management requirements for each trade.

1.07 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN:

A. General: Develop plan consisting of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan.

B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of site-clearing and construction waste generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates.

C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures.

PW1320-A




PAGE 4 of 6

1. Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in this Project, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporation into the Work.

2. Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

3. Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

4. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

5. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility.

6. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location on Project site where materials separation will be located.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

Not Used


3.01 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION:

A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract. Job site is to be cleaned up every day.1. Comply with Section 01 50 00: Temporary Facilities and Controls for

operation, termination, and removal requirements.

B. Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be responsible for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan. Coordinator shall be present at Project site full time for duration of Project.

C. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site.1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within 3 days

of receiving the approved retuned submittal.2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work

on site. Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.

PW1320-A




PAGE 5 of 6

D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.1. Designate and label specific areas of Project site necessary for

separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.

2. Comply with Section 01 50 00: Temporary Facilities and Controls for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.

3.02 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE:

A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.

B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recycling waste materials shall accrue to the Contractor.

C. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical.1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable

waste until they are removed from Project Site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin.a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove

contaminated materials if found.

2. Stockpile processed materials on site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather.5. Remove recyclable waste off Owner’s property and transport to recycling

receiver or processor.

D. Packaging:1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle

and store in a dry location.2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag material.3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove

pallets from Project Site. For pallets that remain on Site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

E. Site-Clearing Wastes: Chip brush, branches, and trees on site.

F. Wood Materials:1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces.

PW1320-A




PAGE 6 of 6

2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.

G. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry location.1. Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small

mobile chipper or hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding.

3.03 DISPOSAL OF WASTE:

A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project Site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be

disposed of accumulate on site.2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on

adjacent surfaces and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.

C. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner’s property and legally dispose of them.

END OF DOCUMENT

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON FIELD OFFICESPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 01 52 13

PAGE 1 of 3

SECTION 01 52 13

FIELD OFFICES

PART 1 – GENERAL





C. Section 01 50 00: Temporary Facilities and Controls


A. Requirements for Field Office.

1.03 SUMMARY:

A. General: Contractor shall maintain a Field Office onsite, during the term of the Contract.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 FIELD OFFICE

A. General: Owner shall provide a small office space for the Contractor onsite to be used as a field office.

2.02 FIELD OFFICE ITEMS

A. General: Provide the Field Office with the following arranged into two (2) workstations:1. Desks: Two desks minimum thirty (30) inches by sixty (60) inches in size

with durable top.2. Chairs: Two (2) chairs: swivel; steel; with seat cushion and arms; 3. Waste Baskets: Two (2) waste baskets4. Computer with access to the internet and email and a connected printer.

B. Equipment: 1. Contractor Portable Toilets: Two (2); each shall include a urinal; each

unit shall be a properly enclosed chemical unit conforming to ANSI Z4.3.a. Location: As directed by Owner.b. Maintenance: Maintain each unit and surrounding areas in a

clean, hygienic and orderly manner, at all time. Empty, clean, and

PW1320-A




PAGE 2 of 3

sanitize each unit each day at a location and time as directed by Owner.

c. Removal: Relocate, or remove from the site, each Portable Toilet. Upon such directive by Owner, the Contractor shall forthwith relocate or remove each Portable Toilet and submit the affected areas to a condition which existed prior to the installation of each Portable Toilet, within three (3) calendar days, or as directed by Owner in writing, at no cost to Owner.

2.03 UTILITY AND SERVICES

A. Telephone Service: Contractor shall provide and interface the entire telephone service, and shall properly and timely pay for telephone service for Owner’s non-long-distance use.

B. Electrical Service: Provide all proper connections and continuously pay for service for the duration of the Work.


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General: Properly prepare area and affected items to receive the Work. Set Work accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; rigidly, securely, and firmly anchor to appropriate structure; install plumb, straight, square, level, true, without racking, rigidly anchored to proper solid blocking, substrate, and the like; provide appropriate type and quantity of reinforcements, fasteners, adhesives, self-adhesive and other tapes; lubricants, coatings, accessories, and the like, as required for a complete, structurally rigid, stable, sound, and appropriately finished installation, in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions, and as indicated. The more restrictive and higher quality requirement shall govern. Moving parts shall be properly secured, without binding, looseness, noise, and the like.

B. Installation: Install portable toilets per State and local codes.

C. Rejected Work: Work, materials, unit, items, systems, and the like, not accepted by Owner shall be deemed rejected, and shall forthwith be removed and replaced with proper and new Work, materials, unit, items, systems, and the like at no cost to Owner.

D. Standard: Comply with manufacturer’s published instructions, or with instructions as shown or indicated; the more restrictive and higher quality requirement shall govern.

E. Location: As directed by Owner.

F. Fire Resistance: Construct and install in accordance with UL requirements.

PW1320-A




PAGE 3 of 3

G. Maintenance: Contractor shall maintain office and adjacent areas in a safe, clean and hygienic condition throughout the duration of the Work, and as directed by Owner. Contractor shall pay cost of all services, repair, and maintenance, or replacement of each item.

H. Removal: Properly remove contents from the Field Office upon completion of the Contract, or as directed by Owner. Forthwith properly patch and repair affected areas; replace damaged items with new items. Carefully and properly inventory, clean, pack, store, and protect Owner property; submit Owner property to Owner at a date, time and location as directed by Owner.

END OF DOCUMENT

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTSPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 01 66 00

PAGE 1 of 2

SECTION 01 66 00

PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 – GENERAL



A. General Conditions, including, without limitation, Site Access Conditions and Requirements;

B. Special Conditions

C. Section 01 50 00: Temporary Facilities and Controls

1.02 PRODUCTS

A. Products are as defined in the General Conditions.

B. Contractor shall not use and/or reuse materials and/or equipment removed from existing Premises, except as specifically permitted by the Contract Documents.

C. Contractor shall provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for similar components.

1.03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

A. Contractor shall transport and handle Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Contractor shall promptly inspect shipments to confirm that Products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged.

C. Contractor shall provide equipment and personnel to handle Products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.

1.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Contractor shall store and protect Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Contractor shall store sensitive products in weather-tight, climate controlled enclosures.

B. For exterior storage of fabricated Products, Contractor shall place on sloped supports, above ground.

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTSPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 01 66 00

PAGE 2 of 2

C. Contractor shall provide off-site storage and protection when Site does not permit on-site storage or protection.

D. Contractor shall cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering and provide ventilation to avoid condensation.

E. Contractor shall store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area and prevent mixing with foreign matter.

F. Contractor shall provide equipment and personnel to store Products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.

G. Contractor shall arrange storage of Products to permit access for inspection and periodically inspect to assure Products are undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

Not Used


Not Used

END OF DOCUMENT

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON CUTTING AND PATCHINGPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 01 73 29

PAGE 1 of 4

SECTION 01 73 29

CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 – GENERAL



A. General Conditions, including, without limitation, Inspector, Inspections, and Tests, Integration of Work, Nonconforming Work, and Correction of Work, and Uncovering Work;


C. Section 02 41 19: Selective Building Demolition

D. Hazardous Materials Procedures and Requirements;

1.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING:

A. Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting, and patching, including associated shoring and bracing, required to complete the Work or to:1. Make several parts fit together properly.2. Uncover portions of Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work.3. Remove and replace defective Work.4. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of Contract

Documents.5. Remove Samples of installed Work as specified for testing.6. Provide routine penetrations of non-structural surfaces for installation of

Duct work, piping, and / or electrical conduit.7. Attaching new materials to existing remodeling areas – including painting

(or other finishes) to match existing conditions.

B. In addition to Contract requirements, upon written instructions from the Owner, Contractor shall uncover Work to provide for observations of covered Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; remove samples of installed materials for testing as directed by Owner; and remove Work to provide for alteration of existing Work.

C. Contractor shall not cut or alter Work, or any part of it, in such a way that endangers or compromises the integrity of the Work, the Project, or work of others.

PW1320-A




PAGE 2 of 4

1.03 SUBMITTALS:

A. Prior to any cutting or alterations that may affect the structural safety of Project, or work of others, and well in advance of executing such cutting or alterations, Contractor shall submit written notice to Owner pursuant to the applicable notice provisions of the Contract Documents, requesting consent to proceed with the cutting or alteration, including the following:1. The work of the Owner or other trades.2. Structural value or integrity of any element of Project.3. Integrity or effectiveness of weather-exposed or weather-resistant

elements or systems.4. Efficiency, operational life, maintenance or safety of operational elements.5. Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements.

B. Contractor's Request shall also include:1. Identification of Project.2. Description of affected Work.3. Necessity for cutting, alteration, or excavations.4. Affects of Work on Owner, other trades, or structural or weatherproof

integrity of Project.5. Description of proposed Work:

a. Scope of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation.b. Trades that will execute Work.c. Products proposed to be used.d. Extent of refinishing to be done.

6. Alternates to cutting and patching.7. Cost proposal, when applicable.8. The scheduled date the Contractor intends to perform the Work and the

duration of time to complete the Work.9. Written permission of other trades whose Work will be affected.


A. Contractor shall ensure that cutting, fitting, and patching shall achieve security, strength, weather protection, appearance for aesthetic match, efficiency, operational life, maintenance, safety of operational elements, and the continuity of existing fire ratings.

B. Contractor shall ensure that cutting, fitting, and patching shall successfully duplicate undisturbed adjacent profiles, materials, textures, finishes, colors, and that materials shall match existing construction. Where there is dispute as to whether duplication is successful or has been achieved to a reasonable degree, the Owner's decision shall be final.

1.05 PAYMENT FOR COSTS:

A. Cost caused by ill-timed or defective Work or Work not conforming to Contract Documents, including costs for additional services of the Owner, its consultants,

PW1320-A




PAGE 3 of 4

including but not limited to the Project Manager, the Architect, the Inspector(s), Engineers, and Agents, will be paid by Contractor and/or deducted from the Contract by the Owner.

B. Owner shall only pay for cost of Work if it is part of the original Contract Price or if a change has been made to the contract in compliance with the provisions of the General Conditions. Cost of Work performed upon instructions from the Owner, other than defective or nonconforming Work, will be paid by Owner on approval of written Change Order. Contractor shall provide written cost proposals prior to proceeding with cutting and patching.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS:

A. Contractor shall provide for replacement and restoration of Work removed. Contractor shall comply with the Contract Documents and with the Industry Standard(s), for the type of Work, and the Specification requirements for each specific product involved. If not specified, Contractor shall first recommend a product of a manufacturer or appropriate trade association for approval by the Owner.

B. Materials to be cut and patched include those damaged by the performance of the Work.


3.01 INSPECTION:

A. Contractor shall inspect existing conditions of the Site and the Work, including elements subject to movement or damage during cutting and patching. After uncovering Work, Contractor shall inspect conditions affecting installation of new products.

B. Contractor shall report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions in writing to Owner as indicated in the General Conditions and shall proceed with Work as indicated in the General Conditions by Owner.

3.02 PREPARATION:

A. Contractor shall provide shoring, bracing, and supports as required to maintain structural integrity for all portions of the Project, including all requirements of the Project.

B. Contractor shall provide devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage.

C. Contractor shall, provide all necessary protection from weather and extremes of temperature and humidity for the Project, including without limitation, any work

PW1320-A




PAGE 4 of 4

that may be exposed by cutting and patching Work. Contractor shall keep excavations free from water.

3.03 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, AND APPLICATION:

A. With respect to performance, Contractor shall:1. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide finished installation

to comply with and match specified tolerances and finishes.2. Execute cutting and demolition by methods that will prevent damage to

other Work, and provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs and new Work.

3. Execute cutting, demolition excavating, and backfilling by methods that will prevent damage to other Work and damage from settlement.

B. Contractor shall employ original installer or fabricator to perform cutting and patching for:1. Weather-exposed surfaces and moisture-resistant elements such as

roofing, sheet metal, sealants, waterproofing, and other trades.2. Sight-exposed finished surfaces.

C. Contractor shall execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with specified products, functions, tolerances, and finishes as shown or specified in the Contract Documents including, without limitation, the Drawings and Specifications.

D. Contractor shall fit Work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. Contractor shall conform to all Code requirements for penetrations or the Drawings and Specifications, whichever calls for a higher quality or more thorough requirement. Contractor shall maintain integrity of both rated and non-rated fire walls, ceilings, floors, etc.

E. Contractor shall restore Work which has been cut or removed. Contractor shall install new products to provide completed Work in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents and as required to match surrounding areas and surfaces.

F. Contractor shall refinish all continuous surfaces to nearest intersection as necessary to match the existing finish to any new finish.

END OF DOCUMENT

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURESPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 01 76 00

PAGE 1 of 3

SECTION 01 76 00

ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES

PART 1 – GENERAL



A. General Conditions, including, without limitation, Integration of Work, Purchase of Materials and Equipment, Uncovering of Work and Non-conforming Work and Correction of Work and Trenches;


PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 PRODUCTS FOR PATCHING AND EXTENDING WORK:

A. New Materials: As specified in the Contract Documents including, without limitation, in the Specifications, Contractor shall match existing products, conditions, and work for patching and extending work.

B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Contractor shall determine by inspection, by testing products where necessary, by referring to existing conditions, and to the Work as a standard.


3.01 EXAMINATION:

A. Contractor shall verify that demolition is complete and that areas are ready for installation of new Work.

B. By beginning restoration Work, Contractor acknowledges and accepts the existing conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION:

A. Contractor shall cut, move, or remove items as necessary for access to alterations and renovation Work. Contractor shall replace and restore these at completion.

B. Contractor shall remove unsuitable material not as salvage unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents. Unsuitable material may include, without limitation, rotted wood, corroded metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete. Contractor shall replace materials as specified for finished Work.

PW1320-A




PAGE 2 of 3

C. Contractor shall remove debris and abandoned items from all areas of the Site and from concealed spaces.

D. Contractor shall prepare surface and remove surface finishes to provide for proper installation of new Work and finishes.

E. Contractor shall close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work from weather and extremes of temperature and humidity. Contractor shall insulate ductwork and piping to prevent condensation in exposed areas. Contractor shall insulate building cavities for thermal and/or acoustical protection, as detailed.

3.03 INSTALLATION:

A. Contractor shall coordinate Work of all alternations and renovations to expedite completion and to accommodate Owner occupancy.

B. Designated Areas and Finishes: Contractor shall complete all installations in all respects, including operational, mechanical work and electrical work.

C. Contractor shall remove, cut, and patch Work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide a means of restoring Products and finishes to original or specified condition.

D. Contractor shall refinish visible existing surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes.

E. Contractor shall install products as specified in the Contract Documents, including without limitation, the Specifications.

3.04 TRANSITIONS:

A. Where new Work abuts or aligns with existing, Contractor shall perform a smooth and even transition. Patched Work must match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance.

B. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new Work is not possible, Contractor shall terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make a recommendation for resolution to the Owner and the Architect for review and approval.

3.05 ADJUSTMENTS:

A. Where removal of partitions or walls results in adjacent spaces becoming one, Contractor shall rework floors, walls, and ceilings to a smooth plane without breaks, steps, or bulkheads.

PW1320-A




PAGE 3 of 3

B. Where a change of plane of 1/4 inch or more occurs, Contractor shall submit a recommendation for providing a smooth transition to the Owner and the Architect for review and approval.

C. Contractor shall trim existing doors as necessary to clear new floor finish and refinish trim as required.

D. Contractor shall fit Work at penetrations of surfaces.

3.06 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SURFACES:

A. Contractor shall patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections.

B. Contractor shall repair substrate prior to patching finish.

3.07 CULTIVATED AREAS AND OTHER SURFACE IMPROVEMENTS:

A. Cultivated or planted areas and other surface improvements which are damaged by actions of the Contractor shall be restored by Contractor to their original condition or better, where indicated.

B. Contractor shall protect and replace, if damaged, all existing guard posts, barricades, and fences.

C. Contractor shall give special attention to avoid damaging or killing trees, bushes and/or shrubs on the Premises and/or identified in the Contract Documents, including without limitation, the Drawings.

3.08 FINISHES:

A. Contractor shall finish surfaces as specified in the Contract Documents, including without limitations, the provisions of all Divisions of the Specifications.

B. Contractor shall finish patches to produce uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be matched, Contractor shall refinish entire surface to nearest intersections.

3.09 CLEANING:

A. Contractor shall continually clean the Site and the Premises as indicated in the Contract Documents, including without limitation, the provisions in the General Conditions and the Specifications regarding cleaning.

END OF DOCUMENT

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON CLOSEOUT PROCEDURESPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 01 77 00

PAGE 1 of 3

SECTION 01 77 00

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 – GENERAL



A. General Conditions, including, without limitation, Completion of Work;


C. Temporary Facilities and Controls.

1.02 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

Contractor shall comply with all closeout provisions as indicated in the General Conditions.

1.03 FINAL CLEANING

A. Contractor shall execute final cleaning prior to final inspection.

B. Contractor shall clean interior and exterior glass and surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, tape, stains, and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, wax and polish new vinyl floor surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.

C. Contractor shall clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition.

D. Contractor shall replace filters of operating equipment.

E. Contractor shall clean debris from roofs, gutters, down spouts, and drainage systems.

F. Contractor shall clean Site, sweep paved areas, and rake clean landscaped surfaces.

G. Contractor shall remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the Site.

1.04 ADJUSTING

Contractor shall adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.

PW1320-A




PAGE 2 of 3

1.05 RECORD DOCUMENTS AND SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Contractor shall legibly mark each item to record actual construction, including:1. Measured depths of foundation in relation to finish floor datum.2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of utilities and appurtenances,

referenced to permanent surface improvements.3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in

construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work.4. Field changes of dimension and detail.5. Details not on original Contract Drawings6. Changes made by modification(s).7. References to related Shop Drawings and modifications.

B. Contractor will provide one set of Record Drawings to Owner.

C. Contractor shall submit all required documents to Owner and/or Architect prior to or with its final Application for Payment.

1.06 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER PERSONNEL

A. Before final inspection, at agreed upon times, Contractor shall instruct Owner's designated personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems.

B. For equipment requiring seasonal operation, Contractor shall perform instructions for other seasons within six months.

C. Contractor shall use operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Contractor shall review contents of manual with personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.

D. Contractor shall prepare and insert additional data in Operation and Maintenance Manual when the need for such data becomes apparent during instruction.

E. Contractor shall use operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Contractor shall review contents of manual with personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.

1.07 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Contractor shall provide products, spare parts, maintenance, and extra materials in quantities specified in the Specifications and in Manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Contractor shall provide Owner all required Operation and Maintenance Data.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

Not Used

PW1320-A




PAGE 3 of 3


Not Used

END OF DOCUMENT

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATAPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 01 78 23

PAGE 1 of 4

SECTION 01 78 23

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 – GENERAL



A. General Conditions, including, without limitation, Completion of the Work;



Contractor shall prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described products.

1.03 FORMAT:

A. Contractor shall prepare data in the form of an instructional manual entitled “OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL & INSTRUCTIONS” (“Manual”).

B. Binders: Contractor shall use commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch, three-side rings, with durable plastic covers; two inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, Contractor shall correlate data into related consistent groupings.

C. Cover: Contractor shall identify each binder with typed or printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL & INSTRUCTIONS"; and shall list title of Project and identify subject matter of contents.

D. Contractor shall arrange content by systems process flow under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of the Contract Documents.

E. Contractor shall provide tabbed fly leaf for each separate product and system, with typed description of product and major component parts of equipment.

F. Text: The content shall include Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 24 pound paper.

G. Drawings: Contractor shall provide with reinforced punched binder tab and shall bind in with text; folding larger drawings to size of text pages.

H. Electronic Data: In addition to the binders described above, Contractor shall submit one (1) USB external drive containing all of the same information contained in the binder (s) in portable document format (PDF) arranged in files

PW1320-A




PAGE 2 of 4

and folders to match the tabs and divisions of the hard copy information of the binder. This includes colored full size scans of the Project Record Documents in PDF format.

1.04 CONTENTS, EACH VOLUME:

A. Table of Contents: Contractor shall provide title of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of the Architect, any Engineers, Subconsultants, Subcontractor(s), and Contractor with name of parties having authority over this Project; and schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of the volume.

B. For Each Product or System: Contractor shall list names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractor(s) and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.

C. Product Data: Contractor shall mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information.

D. Drawings: Contractor shall supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Contractor shall not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings.

E. Text: The Contractor shall include any and all information as required to supplement product data. Contractor shall provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Contractor shall bind in one copy of each.

1.05 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES:

A. Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: Contractor shall include product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. Contractor shall provide information for re-ordering custom manufactured products.

B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Contractor shall include Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.

C. Moisture Protection and Weather Exposed Products: Contractor shall include product data listing applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Contractor shall provide recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair.

D. Additional Requirements: Contractor shall include all additional requirements as specified in the Specifications.

PW1320-A




PAGE 3 of 4

E. Contractor shall provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of data.

1.06 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS:

A. Each Item of Equipment and Each System: Contractor shall include description of unit or system, and component parts and identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. Contractor shall include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature, and commercial number of replaceable parts. Contractor shall include any and all Safety Data Sheets (SDS) as provided by the Manufacturers.

B. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Contractor shall provide new directories for any electrical panel modified or involved in the scope of Work.

C. Contractor shall include color coded wiring diagrams as installed.

D. Operating Procedures: Contractor shall include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Contractor shall include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Contractor shall include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.

E. Maintenance Requirements: Contractor shall include routine procedures and guide for trouble-shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions.

F. Contractor shall provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.

G. Contractor shall include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.

H. Contractor shall include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.

I. Contractor shall provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance.

J. Contractor shall provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed.

K. Contractor shall provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with color coded piping diagrams as installed.

L. Contractor shall provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams.

M. Contractor shall provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.

PW1320-A




PAGE 4 of 4

N. Additional Requirements: Contractor shall include all additional requirements as specified in Specification(s).

O. Contractor shall provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of data.

1.07 SUBMITTAL:

A. Contractor shall submit to the Owner for review an electronic copy of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of the contents of the Manual within thirty (30) days of Contractor’s start of Work.

B. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and to be operated by Owner, Contractor shall submit draft content for that portion of the Manual within ten (10) days after acceptance of that equipment or component.

C. Contractor shall submit two (2) copies of a complete Manual, including PDF files, in final form prior to final Application for Payment. Copy will be returned with Architect/Engineer comments. Contractor must revise the content of the Manual as required by Owner prior to Owner's approval of Contractor’s final Application for Payment.

D. Contractor must submit two (2) copies of revised Manual, including PDF files, in final form within ten (10) days after final inspection.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

Not Used


Not Used

END OF DOCUMENT

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON WARRANTIESPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 01 78 36

PAGE 1 of 2

SECTION 01 78 36

WARRANTIES

PART 1 – GENERAL



A. General Conditions, including, without limitation, Warranty/Guarantee Information;

B. Special Conditions

1.02 FORMAT

A. Binders: Contractor shall use commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch, Three ring D shaped binder with durable plastic covers; ring size shall be as appropriate for the quantity of material within each binder.

B. Cover: Contractor shall identify each binder with typed or printed title "WARRANTIES” and shall list title of Project.

C. Table of Contents: Contractor shall provide title of Project; name, address, and telephone number of Contractor and equipment supplier, and name of responsible principal. Contractor shall identify each item with the number and title of the specific Specification, document, provision, or section in which the name of the product or work item is specified.

D. Contractor shall separate each warranty with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents listing, providing full information and using separate typed sheets as necessary. Contractor shall list each applicable and/or responsible Subcontractor(s), supplier(s), and/or manufacturer(s), with name, address, and telephone number of each responsible principal(s).

1.03 PREPARATION:

A. Contractor shall obtain warranties, executed in duplicate by each applicable and/or responsible subcontractor(s), supplier(s), and manufacturer(s), within ten (10) days after completion of the applicable item or work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, Contractor shall leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the date of completion is determined.

B. Contractor shall verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized, when required.

C. Contractor shall co-execute submittals when required.

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON WARRANTIESPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 01 78 36

PAGE 2 of 2

D. Contractor shall retain warranties until time specified for submittal.

1.04 TIME OF SUBMITTALS:

A. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, Contractor shall submit a draft warranty for that equipment or component within ten (10) days after acceptance of that equipment or component.

B. Contractor shall submit for Owner approval all warranties and related documents within ten (10) days after date of completion. Contractor must revise the warranties as required by the Owner prior to Owner's approval of Contractor’s final Application for Payment.

C. For items of work delayed beyond date of completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as start of warranty period.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

Not Used


Not Used

END OF DOCUMENT

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTSPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 01 78 39

PAGE 1 of 3

SECTION 01 78 39

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 – GENERAL



A. General Conditions, including, without limitation, Documents on Work;


1.02 SUPPLEMENTAL DOCUMENT REQUIREMENTS:

Contractor shall provide, prior to submitting for final payment, the following supplemental documents each bound in its own 3 ring D-ring binder of appropriate size for the quantity of documents.

A. Contractor shall accumulate all Safety Data Sheets (SDS) documentation from previously reviewed submittals and provide a copy of the SDS sheets in a separate binder as part of the close-out requirements.

B. Contractor shall assemble into a binder all Safety Inspection reports accumulated during the construction period. This shall include copies of all on-site Contractor / Subcontractor safety meeting “tailgate meeting”, reports or write-ups from any reviewing or governing authority involved with the observation of safe conduct and operation of personnel on site.

C. Contractor shall assemble into a binder all documents related to hazardous materials phases for demolition, disposal, and clearances. These documents shall be organized into tabs by building and phase. Contractor shall obtain and provide receipts for quantity of materials disposed of including full information of transport company and full information of disposal site receiving said materials.

PART 2 – RECORD DRAWINGS

2.01 GENERAL:

A. As indicated in the Contract Documents, the Owner will provide Contractor with one copy of the drawing set on bond paper of the original Contract Drawings.

B. Contractor shall maintain at the Project Site one set of marked-up plans and shall transfer all changes and information to those marked-up plans, as often as required in the Contract Documents, but in no case less than once each month. Contractor shall submit to the Owner’s Representative one set of red-line on Bond of the Project Record Drawings (“As-Builts”) showing all changes

PW1320-A




PAGE 2 of 3

incorporated into the Work since the preceding monthly submittal. The As-Builts shall be available at the Project Site. The Contractor shall submit bond copies at the conclusion of the Project following review of the red-line records.

C. Label and date each Record Drawing "RECORD DOCUMENT" in legibly printed letters.

D. All deviations in construction, including but not limited to pipe and conduit locations and deviations caused by without limitation Change Orders, Construction Claim Directives, RFI’s, and Addenda, shall be accurately and legibly recorded by Contractor. Contractor shall also record specific pathways for piping and conduit by dimensions from permanent building elements whether or not the routing differs from the diagrammatic pathway of the Contract Drawings.

E. All notations including locations and changes shall be done by Contractor in red ink in a neat and legible manner and, where applicable, indicated by drawing a "cloud" around the changed or additional information. Highlighting of mark-ups or any mark-ups in pencil will not be acceptable in the final deliverable.

2.02 RECORD DRAWING INFORMATION:

A. Contractor shall record the following information:1. Locations of Work buried under or outside each building, including,

without limitation, all utilities, plumbing and electrical lines, and conduits.2. Actual numbering of each electrical circuit.3. Locations of significant Work concealed inside each building whose

general locations are changed from those shown on the Contract Drawings.

4. Locations of all items, not necessarily concealed, which vary from the Contract Documents.

5. Installed location of all cathodic protection anodes.6. Deviations from the sizes, locations, and other features of installations

shown in the Contract Documents.7. Locations of underground work, points of connection with existing utilities,

changes in direction, valves, manholes, catch basins, capped stubouts, invert elevations, etc.

8. Sufficient information to locate Work concealed in each building with reasonable ease and accuracy.

In some instances, this information may be recorded by dimension. In other instances, it may be recorded in relation to the spaces in the building near which it was installed.

B. Contractor shall provide additional drawings as necessary for clarification.

C. Contractor shall provide bond copy of record drawings, made from final Shop Drawings marked "No Exceptions Taken" or "Approved as Noted."

PART 3 – RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

PW1320-A




PAGE 3 of 3

3.01 GENERAL:

Contractor shall mark each section legibly to record manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and supplier of each Product and item of equipment actually installed.

PART 4 – MAINTENANCE OF RECORD DOCUMENTS

4.01 GENERAL

A. Contractor shall store Record Documents apart from documents used for construction as follows:1. Provide files and racks for storage of Record Documents.2. Maintain Record Documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good

order.

B. Do not use Record Documents for construction purposes.

END OF DOCUMENT

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON SELECTIVE BUILDING DEMOLITIONPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 02 41 19

PAGE 1 of 4

SECTION 02 41 19

SELECTIVE BUILDING DEMOLITION

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 DEFINITION OF “NEW WORK”:

A. It is the specific intent of these construction documents that all work shown, indicated, or similarly noted in the construction documents shall be considered new unless specifically noted as “existing”, “E”, “existing to remain”, or “NIC” (not in contract). New work is typically not designated within the drawings by the symbol “(N)”, although it may appear in some specific locations to clarify the work description.

1.02 DESCRIPTION

A. Furnish all materials, labor, equipment and services necessary and incidental to the completion of building demolition work as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.

B. Demolition requirements are shown or implied throughout the construction documents. Provide all demolition work necessary to complete the Work shown in these construction documents, whether or not specific demolition requirements are indicated. Review all documents for a full and complete understanding of demolition, salvage/reuse, relocation and modification of systems or components.

C. Demolition shall include careful disassembly and salvage of components in addition to general demolition.

D. Provide removal and containment of lead-containing or asbestos-containing materials necessary to execute the Work.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS:

A. The requirements of Division 01 apply to the Work of this Section.

B. Hazardous Materials Report provided by Owner

C. Section 01 11 00: Summary of Work

D. Section 01 50 13: Construction Waste Management and Disposal

E. Section 07 54 00: Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing

PW1320-A




PAGE 2 of 4

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Obtain and pay for any bonds, licenses, state environmental authorization, etc., required for Building Demolition Work.

B. Building demolition work shall be accomplished in strict accordance with all local and state building codes, requirements and regulations including but not limited to noise abatement, dust control, classification of disposal materials, etc.

C. Demolition/salvage work shall be performed with minimum damage to existing work to remain.

D. The utmost care shall be taken to maintain the safety of the public and continued operation of essential facility functions. Provide temporary barricades where required to protect staff, public, and property, while maintaining critical facility operations such as intrusion alarms, fire alarms, heating, etc.

1.05 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Obtain from the Owner a set of original construction drawings for all components of the facility and maintain on site at all times for reference of existing conditions.

B. An attempt has been made to show all existing structures, utilities, etc., in their approximate location on the survey and/or working drawings; however, others that are not shown may exist and may be found upon visiting the site or during the demolition work. Accurately locate and determine extent of existing site elements. Demolition contractor shall be completely responsible for reviewing the Owner’s original construction drawings for the entire site and all structures prior to commencing any demolition work.

C. Report existing elements not shown on the working drawings to the Architect so that the proper dispensation of that element may be determined.

D. Attached at the end of this spec section are hazardous materials reports provided by the Owner as a foreign document. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to review this report, and any supplements that may be provided by the Owner, to become familiar with the potential hazardous materials that could be encountered during the scope of this work. The Contractor is required to provide any additional testing before, during, and after work to define specific extents of potentially hazardous materials encountered and to substantiate cleanliness of work area after demolition.

E. Contractor shall be responsible to maintain all interior spaces below area of work free of the affects of weather including rain or blowing debris for the duration of Work. Contractor shall schedule work according to published 10-day weather forecast and must update the schedule on a daily basis. Contractor is required to provide written updates to Owner and Architect for deviations from any previously published schedule.

PW1320-A




PAGE 3 of 4

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

NOT USED


3.01 GENERAL

A. Preparation:1. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers, chain link fences, and

security devices as required. Protect all existing structures, utilities, and site elements which are not indicated to be demolished.

2. Notify all affected utility companies and local authorities and agencies prior to beginning the Work.

B. Environmental Requirements1. Comply with all anti pollution ordinances.2. Noise producing activities shall be held to a minimum. Internal

combustion engines and compressors, etc., shall be equipped with mufflers to reduce noise to a minimum. Comply with all noise abatement ordinances. Work shall be restricted to 7:00 AM to 5:00 PM daily unless special permission is obtained from the Owner’s Representative.

3. Trucks leaving the site shall do so in such a manner that demolition debris will not be deposited on adjacent streets or other properties. This contractor shall promptly remove any demolition debris deposited on streets or other properties.

4. Dust: Operations generating dust shall be controlled by use of wetting truck to prevent the release of dust into the atmosphere. Wetting operations shall be continuous while all dust generating work is in progress. Keep all areas within the demolition area sufficiently dampened to prevent dust from rising due to demolition.

C. Protection and Shoring:1. Any damage done by this contractor to existing structures, utilities, data

lines, pipe lines, etc. not indicated to be removed, shall be repaired by same and at his expense in a manner acceptable to the Owner of the damaged property. This contractor shall report any existing damage prior to the beginning of work.

2. All temporary shoring, bracing, etc., and maintenance thereto required for the completion of demolition work shall be provided by the Contractor.

3. Ensure provisions for adequate bracing, shoring, temporary cross over for pedestrian and vehicular traffic including guard rails, lamps, warning signs, and flags as required by agencies having jurisdiction and as directed by the Owner. Remove same when necessity for protection ceases.

D. Performance1. Coordinate demolition work with the Owner to maintain critical facility

operations.

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON SELECTIVE BUILDING DEMOLITION PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 02 41 19 PAGE 4 of 4

2. Critical Systems: Maintain existing critical systems within the site such as fire alarm, intrusion alarm, communication system, and heating controls until such time as the new system is in place and the changeover can be made without interruption to above systems.

3. Maintain in operating condition active utilities encountered. 4. Exercise extreme caution in removing any fixtures, ceiling material, and

utilities above and below grade to prevent damage to existing utilities which are to remain in service. Existing utilities which are in any way damaged shall be repaired at no additional cost to the Owner.

5. All materials from building demolition will be considered “waste” and shall be removed from the site. Waste material shall be removed from the site daily and not allowed to accumulate. See also section 01 50 13: Construction Waste Management and Disposal. a. No burning or burying of waste material will be permitted. b. Do not use Owner’s dumpsters.

E. Protect any existing and/or adjacent structures and appurtenances that are not to be demolished. Prevent movement or settlement. Provide bracing and shoring as required.

F. Cease operations immediately if adjacent structures appear in danger. Notify the

Owner’s Representative and Architect. Do not resume operations until directed. G. Continuously dampen structures and other demolition areas to prevent dust from

rising during demolition or waste removal. Provide hoses and/or water trucks as required. Cover all trucks prior to them leaving the site as required by state and county requirements.

H. Protect interiors from demolition debris. See section 07 54 00 for additional

details. I. Demolition work at the Central Stores Building shall occur over a three (3)

day weekend coinciding with a City of Stockton furlough Friday.

END OF DOCUMENT

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON METAL FABRICATIONPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 05 50 00

PAGE 1 of 3

SECTION 05 50 00

METAL FABRICATION

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Miscellaneous items such as handrails required to complete the Work.

B. Shop painting and galvanizing as shown and specified.

1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Section 09 91 00 – Painting


A. References:1. ASTM A36 Structural Steel.2. ASTM A53 Hot Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and Seamless Steel

Pipe.3. ASTM A307 Low Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded

Fasteners.4. ASTM A123 Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Products.5. ASTM A501 Hot Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel

Structural Tubing.6. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code.7. FS TT P 31 Paint, Oil: Iron Oxide, Ready Mix, Red and Brown.8. FS TT P 641 Primer Coating, Zinc Dust Zinc Oxide (for Galvanized

Surfaces).

1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01 33 00: Submittals. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, welding, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories.

B. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable.

C. Provide fully engineered construction shop drawings for structural components. Engineered drawings shall be engineered and signed by a California Registered Civil or Structural Engineer.

D. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.

PW1320-A




PAGE 2 of 3

1.06 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Welder Certificate: Submit, per Section 01 45 00: Quality Control, AWS qualification for welders on the job site to perform work under this section.

1.07 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements are as indicated on the drawings. Confirm any discrepancies to the Architect on the shop drawings and prior to commencing work.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Steel Sections: ASTM A36.

B. Sheet Steel: ASTM A653, Structural Steel Classification.

C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A501.

D. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307.

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A36, standard weight block steel galvanized after fabrication.

F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.

G. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: FS TT P 641 or SSPC-20.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. Verify dimensions, slopes, and other constraints on site prior to shop fabrication.

B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.

C. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.

D. Grind exposed welds flush and smooth with adjacent finished surface. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.

E. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or carriage bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of structure, except where specifically noted otherwise.

F. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Supply components required for anchorage of metal fabrications. Fabricate anchorage and related components of same material and finish as metal fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise.

PW1320-A




PAGE 3 of 3

2.03 FINISH

A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.

B. Do not prime surfaces in direct bonding contact with concrete or where field welding is required.

C. Prime items scheduled to be painted with one coat of shop primer or galvanizing as required in the Drawings.

D. Galvanized items to receive minimum 1.25 oz/sq ft. zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A123. Steel items to receive a galvanized finish shall be fabricated in the largest possible section prior to being treated to the hot-dip galvanizing process.


3.01 PREPARATION

A. Obtain Architect approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.

B. Clean and strip site primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is scheduled.

C. Make provision for erection loads with temporary bracing. Keep work in alignment.

D. Supply items required to be cast into concrete with setting templates.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.

B. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1.

C. After installation, touch-up field welds, scratched, or damaged surfaces with primer or galvanizing to match adjacent factory finish.

3.03 SCHEDULE

A. Provide and install items shown on Drawings with anchorage and attachments necessary for installation.

B. Refer to Drawing details for items not specifically scheduled.1. Guard Rails2. Mechanical equipment support frames

END OF DOCUMENT

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON ROUGH CARPENTRYPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 06 10 00

PAGE 1 of 15

SECTION 06 10 00

ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: All labor, materials and equipment and all operations required to complete all rough carpentry and structural framing as indicated on the drawings; to produce shapes and configurations as shown, as required; and as specified herein, including:1. Structural stud wall framing2. Wall sheathing3. Rough hardware, framing connectors, and fasteners4. Treatment of wood5. Concealed wood blocking for support of toilet and bath accessories, wall

cabinets, wood trim, and other work requiring supporting blocking6. Miscellaneous wood nailers and furring strips, including roof applications,

other wood framing, furring, shims or blocking as required to complete the work.

B. Related Sections:1. Pertinent sections of Division 01 specifying Quality Control and Testing

Agency services.2. Pertinent sections of Division 01 specifying Structural Product

Requirements: Structural Product Options, Substitution procedures and limitations, transportation, handling and storage.

3. Section 02 41 19 – Building Demolition4. Section 06 20 00 – Finish Carpentry5. Section 08 41 00 – Aluminum Storefront6. Section 09 24 00 – Lath and Plaster7. Pertinent sections of other divisions specifying cement plaster or window

construction.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/AF & PA National Design Specification for Wood Construction.

B. California Building Code, CBC, California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2, latest edition.

C. PS 1 – Construction and Industrial Plywood; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce).

D. PS 2 – Performance Standard for wood-based structural-use panels (Department of Commerce)

PW1320-A




PAGE 2 of 15

E. PS 20 – American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce).

F. RIS (GR) – Standard Specifications for Grades of California Redwood Lumber; Redwood Inspection Service.

G. WCLIB (GR) – Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber No. 17, September 1991, rev. January 2004; West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.

H. WWPA G-5 – Western Lumber Grading Rules, October 2004; Western Wood Products Association.

I. AWPA – American Wood - Preservers Association.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with pertinent sections of Division 1 specifying submittal procedures. Submit for review prior to fabrication. Submittals that do not meet these requirements will be returned for correction without review.1. Substitutions for products specified require conformance to substitution

requirements in Division 1.2. Review of materials and hardware for substitution to products specified is

at the additional expense of the Contractor.

B. Limitation of Review: Structural Engineer's review will be for general conformance with design intent as indicated in the Contract Documents and does not relieve Contractor of full responsibility for conformance with the Contract Documents. The General Contractor shall review and approve shop drawings prior to submittal to the Architect/Engineer.

C. Product Data:1. Submit manufacturer's product data, specifications, location and

installation instructions for framing connectors, wood preservative materials, application instructions, and fasteners. Include complete, accurate equivalence data when submitting alternate products to those specified. Provide samples of these items upon request.

2. Submit product data and current ICC-ES report for machine-driven nails, fasteners and equipment, including dimensions of all fasteners, including nails, head, shank diameter and nail length.

3. Submit samples of each and every type and size of proposed machine placed nails and fasteners.

D. Shop drawings: For manufactured wood products, submit each building as a complete unit. Do not mix components from multiple buildings or units or work in a submittal. Include all of the following;1. Indicate profiles, sizes, and spacing locations of structural members.2. Cross-reference all shop drawing detail references to contract document

detail references.3. Secure all field measurements as necessary to complete this work.

PW1320-A




PAGE 3 of 15

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Submit all certifications of physical and chemical properties of materials as specified below in Article titled QUALITY ASSURANCE.1. Certify that wood products supplied for rough carpentry meet or exceed

specified requirements, including specified moisture content.


A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies, refer to pertinent sections of Division 01 and CBC Chapter 17A.

B. All tests shall be performed by a recognized testing agency as specified in pertinent sections of Division 01.

C. Inspection of fabricators is required per CBC 1704A.2 unless fabricator is registered and approved by the building official. Wood product quality standards:1. All wood products to comply with 1.02 – REFERENCES above.2. Factory-mark each piece of lumber and sheathing with type, grade, mill

and grading agency, except omit marking from surfaces to be exposed with transparent finish or without finish.

3. Sheathing to be marked by International Accreditation Service, Inc. Accredited testing and inspection agency.

D. End-Jointed lumber shall not be used.

E. Hardware and engineered wood products shall have current ICC ES Evaluation/research reports that are equivalent to products specified.

F. Employ competent workmen experienced in work of the types specified and required.

1.05 MOCK-UP

A. Construct mock-ups of machine-nailed plywood panels using submitted products and demonstrating conditions indicated. Locate where directed.

B. Mock-up shall be accepted and approved by Division of the State Architect Field Representative before commencement of machine nailing activity.

C. Accepted mock-up shall remain exposed for reference for the duration of machine nailing activity.

D. Remove all mock-ups at the completion of the work.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Comply with pertinent requirements of Division 01.

PW1320-A




PAGE 4 of 15

B. Delivery: Time delivery and installation of carpentry products to avoid delaying other trades whose work is dependent on or affected by this section and to comply with moisture content, protection and storage requirements.

C. Keep materials dry at all times. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber and plywood to prevent deformation and provide air circulation within stacks.1. Store materials for which a maximum moisture content is specified only in

areas where relative humidity has been reduced to a level where specified moisture content can be maintained.

2. Handle and store materials above ground to prevent damage, contamination or accumulation of dirt or foreign materials.

3. Provide special protection for horizontal plywood and OSB. Deformation of panels due to moisture is not acceptable.

1.07 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Verify all condition at project site affecting the work; work to field dimensions as required. Coordinate carpentry installation with size, location and installation of service utilities.

B. Sequence rough carpentry installation activities to allow sufficient time for:1. Review of all submittals, including Nailing Sample Submittals.2. Fabrication of mock-ups and required durations as specified.3. Indicate submittal review, procurement, mock-up and testing activities in

the project schedule prior to the start of installation. Installation durations shall be based on hand-nailed installation methods specified.

4. Attainment of specified maximum lumber moisture content.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 DIMENSIONED LUMBER

A. Size per industry standards for nominal sizes shown; S4S.

B. Moisture content of framing: All lumber to be maximum 19% at time of fastener installation. All lumber to be a maximum 19% at time of close-in U.N.O.1. The Owner’s Testing Laboratory may test for moisture content prior to

commencement of close-in.2. The Contractor shall recognize that excessive shrinkage of lumber results

from excess moisture content at the time of installation and will compensate for use of such lumber by waiting for acceptable moisture content before close in and/or by replacing/repairing lumber that has sagged, twisted, or warped prior to close in.

3. Deviation from this specification would require structural redesign of connections and fasteners.

C. Sills on concrete or masonry: No. 2 pressure treated Douglas Fir and as called for on the drawings.

PW1320-A




PAGE 5 of 15

D. Interior structural framing shall be Douglas Fir with grades as noted below, unless otherwise specified on the drawings. All grades are per WCLIB standard grading rules.1. All permanently exposed (interior or protected from weather) framing shall

be select structural grade with no box heart.2. Except per 1 above, U.N.O., minimum grades are:

Floor and roof joists and rafters (2x) and 2x8 and larger studs and plates: D.F. No. 12x4 and 2x6 studs and plates: D/F/ No. 24x and larger: D.F. No. 1 Blocking: D.F. No. 26x8 and larger posts and beams: SGL/CGL per 2.2.A below unless noted otherwise on the drawings.

E. Exterior structural framing (exposed to weather) shall be redwood select structural grade or pressure treated D.F. No. 1, U.N.O.

F. Structural decking shall be D.F. select decking or White Pine select where not exposed to moisture and Alaskan Cedar where directly exposed to moisture or high humidity for prolonged periods of time. Moisture content at time of installation to be less than 12%.

G. Framing not otherwise shown or specified: Douglas Fir, construction grade per WCLIB paragraphs applicable to uses and sizes required.

H. Splits and checks are to be limited to 1x the depth of the member.

I. Warped/twisted and excessively checked members shall not be used regardless of grade marks.

2.02 MANUFACTURED LUMBER

A. Structural Glued Lumber (SGL) or Certified Glued Lumber (CGL): When so noted on the drawings, beams and posts 6x8 and larger (not specified as glue-laminated post or beams) are to be SGL/CGL conforming to WCLIB grading rules, DSA IR23-10, and ICC AC 47 for D.F. #1 Grade. All SGL/CGL lumber shall be graded and stamped accordingly. Glue-laminated Timber of equal size and grade meeting the requirements of section 06180 may be substituted for SGL/CGLAcceptable products:1. Rosboro RMT by Rosboro2. Approved equal

B. Laminated Veneer Lumber (LVL); when so noted on the drawings, for use as joist, beams, blocking or studs. Conform to ICC AC 47. Minimum Fb = 2,600 PSI. Minimum E=1,900,000 PSI.Acceptable products:1. Microllam LVL by Trus Joist, ICC ESR-1387

PW1320-A




PAGE 6 of 15

2. PW LVL by Pacific Woodtech, ICC ESR-29093. Approved equal

C. Laminated Strand Lumber (LSL); for use as blocking (flat or vertical) or rim joist when used with IJ or LVL. Conform to ICC AC 124. Minimum Fb = 2,600 PSI. Minimum E=1,700,000 PSI.Acceptable products:1. Timberstrand LSL by Trus Joist, ICC ESR-13872. Approved equal

D. Parallel Strand Lumber (PSL); for use as beams and posts when so noted on the drawings. Conform to ICC AC 47. Minimum Fb = 2,900 PSI. Minimum E = 2,000,000 PSI.1. Parallam PSL by Trus Joist, ICC ESR-13872. Approved equal

2.03 MANUFACTURED STRUCTURAL PANELS

A. Plywood: All structural plywood shall be grade marked for conformance with PS 1 and shall be fabricated with exterior glue. Grades shall be as required on the drawings.

B. Oriented Strand Board (OSB): Not Permitted.

2.04 TREATED WOOD:

A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA V1- use category systems for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions and specific applications.

B. Preservative Treated Lumber1. General

a. Lumber in contact with concrete or masonry, and at other locations required by Code shall be pressure treated in accordance with CBC 2303, using waterborne preservatives. Lumber shall be Douglas Fir No. 2 (or better). Cut faces of treated wood shall be brush treated (two complete applications) prior to installation.

b. Kiln dry to 15% moisture content after treatment, and stamp "DRY".

c. Each piece of wood shall be stamped by the wood preservative applicator to indicate and identify its treatment. Markings shall include minimum retention of preservative treatment as required in applicable CBC Standards for lumber and plywood.

2. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA Use Category UC3B, Commodity Specification A (Treatment C2) using waterborne preservative to 0.25 lb/cu ft retention. Penetration of preservative shall conform to AWPA guidelines.

PW1320-A




PAGE 7 of 15

a. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 15 percent

b. Treat lumber in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofingc. Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concreted. Treat wood less than 12 inches above grade or 6 inches above

adjacent concrete paving or mowstrip

3. Treated Lumber, Poles, Posts and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications.

4. Preservative Types: Maximum Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) content of field-applied preservative is 350 grams per liter. Either of the following;a. Copper Azole (CA-B) per ICC-ES AC143b. Alkaline/Copper/Quaternary (ACQ)

C. Fire Retardant Treatment: Product and application process must be recommended by manufacturer of treatment as being suitable for painting. Application shall be by a California State Fire Marshal approved licensed contractor.1. Exterior Type: AWPA Use Category UCFB, Commodity Specification H

(Treatment C20 for lumber and C27 for plywood), chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread rating of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes both before and after accelerated weathering test performed in accordance with ASTM D 2898.a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of

19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood.b. Treat exposed exterior rough carpentry items, including stairways,

balconies, and covered walkwaysc. Do not use treated wood in direct contact with the ground.

2. Interior Type A: AWPA Use Category UCFA, Commodity Specification H (Treatment C20 for lumber and C27 for plywood), low temperature (low hygroscopic) type, chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread rating of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes.a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of

19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood.b. Treat rough carpentry items as indicated.c. Do not use treated wood in applications exposed to weather or

where the wood may become wet.

2.05 FASTENERS AND ACCESSORIES

A. General requirements for fasteners:

PW1320-A




PAGE 8 of 15

1. Fasteners shall be of adequate size, spacing and number to resist design loads under intended use, and types shall be appropriate for the materials or conditions for which used.

2. Provide washers, pre-drilling, etc. as required for proper installation and to prevent damage to framing.

3. Fasteners shall be hot-dip galvanized (ASTM A153), mechanically galvanized (ASTM B695 class 55 minimum), stainless steel, or silicon bronze or copper by approved methods for the following applications:a. Exterior, exposed useb. In contact with preservative or fire-retardant treated wood

4. Fasteners in moist corrosive atmosphere to be of stainless steel.5. All fasteners specified by manufacturer shall be installed in framing

hardware.

B. Nails and nailing not otherwise shown or specified:1. Comply with requirements of governing building code.2. For securing materials to hardened concrete or masonry: hardened steel

masonry nails or Titen screws.3. For framing and general woodwork: Common bright wire nails (not box

nails) per ASTM F 1667. 16d cement coated sinker nails may be used in lieu of common nails for framing, unless noted otherwise on the drawings.

4. Nails for plywood shall be of common wire with full round heads and shall be of sufficient length to fully develop the nails.

5. Pneumatically driven nails of all types must comply with the requirements of this section. All proposed nails shall match diameter and penetration of specified nails.

6. Staples shall conform to length and gauges specified and shall be installed to match specified patterns and spacing.

7. Powder-actuated Fastenings: Use only as approved by the Architect/Engineer; operators shall be qualified.

C. Bolts: Malleable iron washers or steel plate washers, unless otherwise shown, shall be provided under all bolt heads and nuts. 1. Machine Bolts: ASTM A307 and ASME B18.2.1, standard semi-finished

machine bolts as shown or required. Nuts shall be standard size unless noted otherwise and shall be per ASTM A563.

2. Bolts in Concrete: Expansion or screw anchors set after casting shall be HiltiKwik Bolt TZ, Simpson Strong Bolt, Simpson Strong Bolt 2, or Titen HD screws.

3. Anchor bolts are to be formed from ASTM A36 rod with plate washer in concrete, or to be ASTM A307 Machine Bolts with standard head. No upset threads allowed. No L or J bolts allowed.

D. Lag screws: Standard hex lag screws per ASME B 18.2.1

E. Wood screws: Standard wood screws per ASME B 18.6.1

PW1320-A




PAGE 9 of 15

F. Framing hardware: Fabricated sheet metal timber framing connectors shall be manufactured from painted or galvanized G90 steel by "Simpson Company", Dublin, CA; (Simpson Co. per catalogue C-2013 are identified on the drawings), “USP Lumber Connectors“, Livermore, CA, or approved equivalent. Connectors shall be at least 16 gauge material, (1/8" plate materials where welded), unless otherwise noted, punched for nailing. All heavy hardware to be fabricated from A36 steel per Division 5, Metals. All hardware intended for exterior exposed use shall be galvanized per G185 ASTM A653.1. For contact with preservative or fire-retardant treated wood, provide

minimum G185 galvanizing per ASTM A 653/A 653M.2. Nails and nailing shall conform to the manufacturer’s instructions with a

nail provided for each punched hole. Nails to be used with framing accessories, subject to the requirements specified in this section for fasteners and anchors.

G. Subfloor Glue: Water proof, water base, air cure type, cartridge dispensed AFG-01. Maximum Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) content is 50 grams per liter.

2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. The Testing Agency, as specified in the Article QUALITY ASSURANCE, will perform the following tests:1. Moisture content of all lumber at time of fastener installation.

B. The Testing Agency will submit reports as specified in Division 1.


3.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURAL FRAMING

A. General1. Refer to drawings for layouts, notes and details, provide framing as

required; comply with governing building code requirements.2. Provide framing to achieve true alignments as surfaces receiving finish

materials.3. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide and install all

wood blocking, furring strips, or grounds detailed or required to provide anchorage for all finishes, accessories, fixtures, etc. as required to complete all work. All blocking and/or backing shall be securely bolted or otherwise anchored in place.

4. Contractor shall be responsible for layout of anchor bolts, and other hardware embedded in concrete when placed by other trades.

5. Provide and install all structural framing, blocking, fasteners, brackets, clips, etc. as required to complete work specified in the Construction Documents.

B. Framing:1. Sill Plates and Ledgers:

PW1320-A




PAGE 10 of 15

a. Sill plates and ledgers on concrete shall be anchored with bolts, shall have full bearing on concrete, and shall be placed for plywood nailing as indicated. All bolt nuts shall be provided with a cut plate steel washer for bearing on wood.

b. Provide a minimum of two sill anchor bolts per sill piece with a bolt no less than 4 1/2 "and no more than 12" from the end of the sill. Bolts to be 5/8" diameter x 12" (18” at curb) long at 48” on centers, unless otherwise shown or noted. Provide additional anchor bolts each side of a notch or hole, as per a typical plate splice, where notch or hole is in excess of 50% of the plate width. At shear walls, provide a plate washer 3” x 3” x 0.229” between the sill and nut at anchor bolts. Plate washer to extend within 1/2 inch of the structural wall sheathing. Offset and/or stagger anchor bolts, or provide larger plate washer as required.

c. Anchor bolt holes in sill plates or ledgers shall be 1/16" maximum larger than anchor bolt.

2. Stud Walls and Framing:a. Cut studs and posts with square ends, unless otherwise shown or

noted. All posts and beams shall be "cut to bear" unless otherwise detailed.

b. All studs in walls shall be placed with the shortest dimension parallel to the run of the wall. Bearing studs shall extend full height to be the supporting framing as shown; non-bearing studs shall extend to the supporting framing.

c. Provide double studs on each side of all openings, unless shown or noted otherwise.

d. All openings in stud walls and partitions shall be framed with headers across the top, as shown, with a minimum size (6" deep x stud width) resting on short cripple studs, and as shown on the drawings.

e. All stud partitions and walls shall have horizontal solid blocking not less than 2 x and of the same width as the stud, fitted and nailed into the studs at mid-height of stud, for studs over 8 feet in height, except as otherwise shown or specified. This blocking shall be so spaced that there shall be no concealed air spaces greater than eight feet in any dimension.

f. Stud partitions containing plumbing, heating or other pipes shall be so framed as to give proper clearance for piping. Plumbing, heating and vent pipes exceeding 1-1/2" in inside diameter shall not be placed in partitions used as bearing or shear walls unless completely furred clear of the wall. No notching shall be allowed. Pipes shall be placed in the center of the plate using a neat bored hole and the plates shall be strapped on each side with 3" x 36" x 14 gauge steel punched for 10d nails 3" on center, staggered, or as shown on the drawings.

3. Top Plates

PW1320-A




PAGE 11 of 15

a. Top plates shall be double, set single. Corners where stud wall or partitions meet shall be framed with studs on all surfaces and blocking to form a "rigid" corner with nailing for all corners. Double top plates shall be lapped at corners. Lap splices and nailing per the drawings.

4. Floor, Roof and Ceiling Framinga. Joists and beams shall be accurately aligned and the position and

spacing of all joists and beams shall be as shown and be coordinated with other framing and to other trades prior to actual construction.

b. Place all joists and beams with crown up. Cantilevered joists and beams shall be placed with the crown down.

c. Cutting of wood girders, beams or joists for electrical and mechanical lines shall be limited to cuts and bored holes not deeper than 1/5 of the beam depth from the top and located not farther from the support than three times the beam depth and not less than the beam depth. Cuts in excess of this, or single bored holes with a diameter of more than 1" are not permitted without special provisions for framing the beams. Location of all cuts in framing shall receive the prior review of the Architect/Engineer.

d. Provide vent holes in rafters and/or blocking as shown and/or directed by the Architect.

3.02 STRUCTURAL SHEATHING

A. General1. Sheathing nailing shall be as required on the drawings. Do not overdrive

(Do not break skin of sheathing face sheet). Over driving will be cause for rejection.

2. Form sheathing may be re-used for concealed sheathing provided the lumber at the time of re-use is approved by the Architect, meets with the framing grade requirements specified herein, is in good condition, and is thoroughly cleaned with all nails removed.

3. Pneumatic nailing devices shall be adjustable so that nail heads do not penetrate skin of sheathing. Contractor shall submit equipment and nails for review prior to use. Refer to section 2.05 for other nailing requirements.

B. Roof and Floor Sheathing: Except "Panelized Roofs", lay with face grain perpendicular to roof rafters, roof trusses or floor joists. Stagger sheets. Block all unsupported sheet edges with 2x material unless noted otherwise.

C. Wall Sheathing: Lay with face grain either parallel or perpendicular to studs. Exposed bottom edges shall be sealed as recommended by manufacturer. Block all unsupported sheet edges with 2x materials unless noted otherwise.

PW1320-A




PAGE 12 of 15

D. Panelized Roofs: Where sheathing is set @ 8'-0 1/8" spacing, cut every fourth sheet short by 1/2" to re-align structural framing that has been specified to be spaced at even units of 2, 4 or 8 feet.

3.03 ROUGH HARDWARE

A. General: Nails, spikes, screws, fabricated sheet metal anchors, ties, hangers and any other materials shown or required for the attachment of wood to concrete and wood to steel and wood to wood shall be furnished and installed as part of this work.

B. Framing Nailing: All framing nailing shall conform to minimum requirements of the Building Code, and with details shown on the drawing.

C. Bolts, Lag Screws and Washers:1. Bolts in wood shall be machine bolts unless otherwise noted and shall be

of such length that the bearing length of the treads does not exceed ¼ of the full bearing length in the member holding the treads. Bolt holes in wood shall be 1/32" oversized. Bolt holes for sill plates may be 1/16" maximum oversize. Holes in steel shall be 1/16" oversize. See Section 3.1 B.1.b for anchor bolts at sill plates and ledgers.

2. Provide square plate or malleable iron washer and nut at head where bearing is against wood; cut washer under nut where it is against steel. Washer will not be required under head of carriage bolts. Provide malleable iron washers where exposed.

3. All nuts shall be tightened when placed and retightened at completion of the job or immediately before closing with final construction.

4. Lag screws shall be screwed (not driven) into place. Drill holes same diameter and depth as shank, then drill pilot holes same diameter as at base of thread for the threaded portion.

D. Wood Screws: Minimum penetration is (10) diameters unless noted otherwise. Where fastening hardwood timber species or where wood tends to split, provide pilot hole 70% of screw shank diameter.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS WOOD

A. Coordinate installation of wood decking, wood chord metal joists, glue laminated structural units, prefabricated wood trusses, and plywood web joists.

B. Curb roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are provided. Form corners by alternating lapping side members. Fasten curbs corner-to-corner and to rafters with framing connectors configured for this application.

C. Blocking:1. Provide fire blocking at locations and spacing’s as required by CBC

Chapter 7. Locate other blocking, supplementary framing, backing plates and bracing to facilitate installation of finish materials, fixtures, equipment, services, accessories and trim requiring attachment and support.

PW1320-A




PAGE 13 of 15

2. Solid block joists and rafters over all supports with blocking of the same size and material as the joist or rafter.

D. Furring:1. Nominal 1 inch x 3 inch minimum, continuous and spaced at 16 inches on

center, maximum.2. Install plumb, rigid, and level. Shim where necessary to provide a true,

even plane suitable to receive the finish required.3. Attach to concrete and masonry as shown in the contract drawings.

E. Bridging: Use 2 inch solid cross bridging. Nail bottom ends of bridging only after sheathing has been nailed.

F. Stair Framing: Provide with 3 stair stringers for each set of stairs, unless otherwise shown. Cut notches to receive exact size of treads and risers (if any) shown, with no change in dimensions between landings. Provide stringers of size shown, or if not shown, of a size to allow not less than 3-1/2 inch of effective depth, measured perpendicular to the rake of the stringer, after notching.

G. Install miscellaneous metal angles, bolts and other items; secure into formwork where embedded in concrete.

H. Install accessory items not otherwise set under other sections; after completion of painting and other finishing work; in locations shown or directed by the Architect. Set items plumb, level and secure using appropriate fastening as applicable.

3.05 FIELD APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT

A. Field treat all end cuts and holes in preservative treated materials per section 2.04.

B. Apply two brush coats; or fill-immersion dip not less than 15 minutes; or as required to thoroughly saturate all surfaces after cutting.

C. Air dry 2-hours minimum before installation.

3.06 TOLERANCES

A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum.

B. Surface Flatness of Floor: 1/8 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet maximum.

C. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/8 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet maximum. Provide framed substrates meeting requirements for application of finishes specified in other sections.

PW1320-A




PAGE 14 of 15

D. Exposed surfaces shall be free from dents and tool marks, unsanded rough or torn faces and corners, and other defects.

3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. The Testing Agency, as specified in the Article QUALITY ASSURANCE, will perform the following tests and submit reports as specified in Division 01: 1. Moisture content of all lumber at time of close-in.2. Periodic special inspection of nailing, bolting, and other fastening within

the seismic-force-resisting system including shear walls, wood diaphragms etc per CBC 1707A.3.

3. Special inspection of high load diaphragms per CBC 1704A.6.1 where designated on documents.

3.08 ADJUSTING

A. Replace all defective work at Contractor's expense.

B. Replace defective or damaged work with conforming work.

C. Correct defects using means that will not injure the materials.

D. Replace defective or damaged work which cannot be corrected in the field with new work, or return defective items to the shop for repair.

E. Repair or replace framing lumber sagged, twisted or warped due to shrinkage from excessive moisture content at time of installation, or from other causes.

F. Adjust to meet specified tolerances.

G. Architect/Engineer shall review all proposals for the repair or replacement of damaged, defective, or missing work.

H. Pay expenses incurred by Owner for Architect/Engineer's costs for (re-)design and obtaining approvals of Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) necessitated by incomplete, inefficiently scheduled, improperly performed, defective or nonconforming work.

I. Pay expenses due to re-testing and re-inspection necessitated by incomplete, inefficiently scheduled, improperly performed, defective or nonconforming work.

3.09 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean all surfaces upon completion of erection, leave free of grime and dirt. Remove unused materials, tools, equipment and debris from the premises and leave surfaces broomed clean.

B. Waste Disposal: Comply with the requirements of pertinent sections of Division 01 specifying cleaning and disposal.

PW1320-A




PAGE 15 of 15

1. Comply with applicable regulations.2. Do not burn scrap on project site.3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated.4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to

co-generation facilities or “waste-to-energy” facilities.

C. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill.

D. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system.

E. Protect work from damage by subsequent operations.

END OF SECTION

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON ROOF AND DECK INSULATIONPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 07 22 00

PAGE 1 of 10

lokcSECTION 07 22 00

ROOF AND DECK INSULATION

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. Flat Polyiso Roof Insulation1. Faced with non-asphaltic, fiber-reinforced cellulosic organic felt facers on

both major surfaces of the core foam (GRF).a. ACFoam®-II

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. 06 10 00: Rough Carpentry

B. 07 54 00: Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C1289: Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Insulation Board.

B. ASTM D312: Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in Roofing.

C. ASTM E108: Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests or Roof Coverings.

D. ASTM E119: Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.

E. FM 4450: Approval Standard – Class I Insulated Steel Roof Decks

F. FM 4470: Approval Standard – Class I Roof Covers.

G. LTTR: Long Term Thermal Resistance predicated by CAN/ULC-S770-09.

H. UL 263: Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.

I UL 790: Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings.

J. UL 1256: Fire Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings.

K. ASTM E2114: Standard Terminology for Sustainability Relative to the Performance of Buildings.

L. ASTM E2129: Standard Practice for Data Collection for Sustainability Assessment of Building Products.

PW1320-A




PAGE 2 of 10

1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. LTTR (Long Term Thermal Resistance): Defined as using techniques from ASTM C1303 or CAN/ULC-S770-09, the predicated R-Value that has been shown to be equivalent to the average performance of a permeably faced foam insulation product over 15 years. LTTR applies to ALL foam insulation products with blowing agents other than air, such as Polyiso, extruded polystyrene and polyurethane. The new method is based on consensus standards in the US and Canada.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00: Submittals and 01 25 13: Product Options and Substitutions.

B. Product Data:1. Manufacturer’s Specifications.2. Installation instructions for insulation board and fasteners.3. Product Data as per ASTM E2129: Standard Practice for Data Collection

for Sustainability Assessment of Building Products.

C. Samples:1. Submit minimum 6 inch by 6 inch (152 millimeters by 152 millimeters) of

each board type required.2. Submit samples of each fastener type required.

D. Shop Drawings:1. Roof plan showing layout of boards and fastening patterns.

E. Certificates:1. System Manufacturer’s or Insulation Manufacturer’s Certification that the

insulation meets Zero ODP (Ozone Depletion Potential) and Zero GWP (Global Warming Potential) specification requirements.

F. Thermal Warranty:1. Submit sample warranty indicating conditions and limitations.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum twenty five years documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in the installation of products specified in this section with minimum 5 years documented experience in installing products of the same type and scope as specified.

C. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship.1. Finish areas designated by Architect.

PW1320-A




PAGE 3 of 10

2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship is approved by Architect.

3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.

D. Pre-installation Meeting: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, substrate conditions and insulation manufacturer’s installation instructions.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Comply with general requirements specified in sections 01 65 00 and 01 66 00.

B. Deliver product in packages labeled with material name, thermal value and product code.

C. When stored outdoors or on the jobsite, the insulation should be stacked on pallets at least three inches above ground level and completely covered with a waterproof covering such as a tarpaulin. The temporary factory-applied packaging should be slit or removed to prevent accumulation of condensation. Insulation which has become wet or damaged should be removed and replaced with solid, dry insulation.

1.08 SEQUENCING

A. Ensure that information required for installation of products in this section is furnished to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of construction progress.

B. Ensure that products of this section are supplied to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of construction progress.

C. Coordinate installation with roof membrane manufacturer’s installation instructions.

1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer’s absolute limits.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Atlas Roofing Corporation, address: 2000 Riveredge Parkway Suite 800 Atlanta, GA 30328, phone: 800-388-6134, web: www.atlasroofing.com

PW1320-A

http://www.atlasroofing.com/




PAGE 4 of 10

B. Substitutions: Submit substitutions under section 01 25 13: Product Options and Substitutions.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. ACFoam®-II GRF Roof Insulation: Flat closed-cell polyisocyanurate (polyiso) foam core integrally bonded to non-asphaltic, fiber-reinforced organic felt facers.1. Compliance:

a. ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2 (20 psi) or Grade 3 (25 psi).

b. CAN/ULC-S704 Type 2, Class 3 or Type 3, Class 3.c. CCMC No. 12464-L.d. UL Certified for Canada- Insulated Roof Deck Assemblies

Construction No. C38 and 52. Meet CAN/ULC-S126, CAN/ULC-S101 and CAN/ULC-S107.

e. UL Standard 1256 Classification: Construction No. 120, 123 & 292.

f. UL Standard 790 (ASTM E108): Roofing Systems Classification.g. UL Standard 263 (ASTM E119): Fire Resistance Classification.h. UL Standard 1897: Uplift Resistance.i. FM Standard 4450 & 4470 Approved: Refer to FM Approvals ®

RoofNav for Specific Systems Details.j. IBC Chapter 26 & National Building Code: Sections on Foam

Insulation.k. California State Insulation Quality Standards.l. Title 25 Foam Flammability Criteria (T 1231).m. Miami-Dade County Product Control Approved.n. State of Florida Product Approval: FL17989.o. Dimensional Stability (ASTM D2126): <2%.p. Compressive Strength (ASTM D1621): 20 psi (140 kPa) or 25 psi

(172 kPa).q. Water Absorption (ASTM C209): <1.5%.r. Water Absorption (ASTM D2842): <3.5%.s. Water Vapor Transmission (ASTM E96): <1.5 perm

(85.5ng/(Pa•s•m2))t. Product Density (ASTM D1622): Nominal 2.0 pcf (32.04 kg/m3).u. Flame Spread (ASTM E84 10 min.): 40-60.v. Smoke Development (ASTM E84 10 min.): 50-170.w. Tensile Strength (ASTM D1623): >730 psf (35 kPa).x. Service Temperature: -100°F to +250°F.y. Panel Area:

1) 4ft x 8ft (1220mm x 2440mm)2) 4ft x 4ft (1220mm x 1220mm)

z. Panel Thickness:1) 1.0” (25.4mm): LTTR - 5.72) 1.5” (38.1mm): LTTR - 8.63) 2.0” (50.8mm): LTTR - 11.44) 2.5” (63.5mm): LTTR - 14.4

PW1320-A




PAGE 5 of 10

5) 3.0” (76.2mm): LTTR - 17.46) 3.5” (88.9mm): LTTR - 20.57) 4.0” (101.6mm): LTTR - 23.6

B. Tapered ACFoam®-II GRF Roof Insulation: Tapered closed-cell polyisocyanurate (polyiso) foam core integrally bonded to non-asphaltic, fiber-reinforced organic felt facers.1. Compliance:

a. ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2 (20 psi) or Grade 3 (25 psi).

b. CAN/ULC-S704 Type 2, Class 3 or Type 3, Class 3.c. CCMC No. 12464-L.d. UL Certified for Canada- Insulated Roof Deck Assemblies


e. UL Standard 1256 Classification: Construction No. 120, 123 & 292.

f. UL Standard 790 (ASTM E108): Roofing Systems Classification.g. UL Standard 263 (ASTM E119): Fire Resistance Classification.h. UL Standard 1897: Uplift Resistance.i. FM Standard 4450 & 4470 Approved: Refer to FM Approvals®

RoofNav for Specific Systems Details.j. IBC Chapter 26 & National Building Code: Sections on Foam

Insulation.k. California State Insulation Quality Standards.l. Title 25 Foam Flammability Criteria (T 1231).m. Miami-Dade County Product Control Approved.n. State of Florida Product Approval: FL17989.o. Dimensional Stability (ASTM D2126): <2%. p. Compressive Strength (ASTM D1621): 20 psi (140 kPa) or 25 psi

(172 kPa).q. Water Absorption (ASTM C209): <1.5%.r. Water Absorption (ASTM D2842): <3.5%.s. Water Vapor Transmission (ASTM E96): <1.5 perm

(85.5ng/(Pa•s•m2))t. Product Density (ASTM D1622): Nominal 2.0 pcf (32.04 kg/m3).u. Flame Spread (ASTM E84 10 min.): 40-60.v. Smoke Development (ASTM E84 10 min.): 50-170.w. Tensile Strength (ASTM D1623): >730 psf (35 kPa).x. Service Temperature: -100°F to +250°F.y. Panel Area:

1) 4ft x 4ft (1220mm x 1220mm)

z. Panel Thickness:1) AA

i. Slope: 1/8” per ft.ii. Minimum Thickness: 0.5” (12mm)iii. Maximum Thickness: 1.0” (25.4mm)iv. Average Thickness: 0.75” (19mm)

PW1320-A




PAGE 6 of 10

v. Average LTTR Value: 4.3

2) Ai. Slope: 1/8” per ft.ii. Minimum Thickness: 1.0” (25.4mm)iii. Maximum Thickness: 1.5” (38.1mm)iv. Average Thickness: 1.25” (31.8mm)v. Average LTTR Value: 7.1

3) Bi. Slope: 1/8” per ft.ii. Minimum Thickness: 1.5” (38.1mm)iii. Maximum Thickness: 2.0” (50.8mm)iv. Average Thickness: 1.75” (44.5mm)v. Average LTTR Value: 10.0

4) Ci. Slope: 1/8” per ft.ii. Minimum Thickness: 2.0” (50.8mm)iii. Maximum Thickness: 2.5” (63.5mm)iv. Average Thickness: 2.25” (57.2mm)v. Average LTTR Value 12.9

5) Xi. Slope: 1/4” per ft.ii. Minimum Thickness: 0.5” (12mm)iii. Maximum Thickness: 1.5” (38.1mm)iv. Average Thickness: 1.0” (25.4mm)v. Average LTTR value: 5.7

6) Yi. Slope: 1/4” per ft.ii. Minimum Thickness: 1.5” (38.1mm)iii. Maximum Thickness: 2.5” (63.5mm)iv. Average Thickness: 2.0” (50.8mm)v. Average LTTR value: 11.4

7) Qi. Slope: 1/2” per ft.ii. Minimum Thickness: 0.5” (12mm)iii. Maximum Thickness: 2.5” (63.5mm)iv. Average Thickness: 1.5” (38.1mm)v. Average LTTR Value: 8.6

C. Gemini™ Pre-Cut Cricket: Pre-cut tapered polyisocyanurate (polyiso) roof insulation fabricated of factory cut and hinged triangular shaped Tapered ACFoam®-II and flat ACFoam®-II.1. Compliance:

PW1320-A




PAGE 7 of 10

a. ACFoam®-II faced product: Tapered or Flat closed-cell polyisocyanurate (polyiso) foam core integrally bonded to non-asphaltic, fiber-reinforced organic felt facers.1) ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2 (20 psi) or Grade

3 (25 psi).2) CAN/ULC-S704 Type 2, Class 3 or Type 3, Class 3.3) CCMC No. 12464-L.4) UL Certified for Canada- Insulated Roof Deck Assemblies


5) UL Standard 1256 Classification: Construction No. 120, 123 & 292.

6) UL Standard 790 (ASTM E108): Roofing Systems Classification.

7) UL Standard 263 (ASTM E119): Fire Resistance Classification.

8) UL Standard 1897: Uplift Resistance.9) FM Standard 4450 & 4470 Approved: Refer to FM

Approvals® RoofNav for Specific Systems Details.10) IBC Chapter 26 & National Building Code: Sections on

Foam Insulation.11) California State Insulation Quality Standards.12) Title 25 Foam Flammability Criteria (T 1231).13) Miami-Dade County Product Control Approved.14) State of Florida Product Approval: FL17989.15) Dimensional Stability (ASTM D2126): <2%.16) Compressive Strength (ASTM D1621): 20 psi (140 kPa) or

25 psi (172 kPa).17) Water Absorption (ASTM C209): <1.5%.18) Water Absorption (ASTM D2842): <3.5%.19) Water Vapor Transmission (ASTM E96): <1.5 perm

(85.5ng/(Pa•s•m2))20) Product Density (ASTM D1622): Nominal 2.0 pcf (32.04

kg/m3).21) Flame Spread (ASTM E84 10 min.): 40-60.22) Smoke Development (ASTM E84 10 min.): 50-170.23) Tensile Strength (ASTM D1623): >730 psf (35 kPa).24) Service Temperature: -100°F to +250°F.

b. Triangular Panel Area: Applies to Flat and Tapered Gemini™ Pre-Cut Cricket Panels.1) Length: 4ft (1220mm)2) Width:12ft (3660mm)

c. Tapered Panel Thickness:1) X

i. Slope: 1/4” per ft.ii. Minimum Thickness: 0.5” (12mm)iii. Maximum Thickness: 1.5” (38.1mm)

PW1320-A




PAGE 8 of 10

iv. Average Thickness: 1.0” (25.4mm)v. Average LTTR value: 5.7

2) Yi. Slope: 1/4” per ft.ii. Minimum Thickness: 1.5” (38.1mm)iii. Maximum Thickness: 2.5” (63.5mm)iv. Average Thickness: 2.0” (50.8mm)v. Average LTTR value: 11.4

3) Qi. Slope: 1/2” per ft.ii. Minimum Thickness: 0.5” (12mm)iii. Maximum Thickness: 2.5” (63.5mm)iv. Average Thickness: 1.5” (38.1mm)v. Average LTTR Value: 8.6

d. Flat Panel Thickness:1) 2.0” (50.8mm): R - 11.4

F. Gemini™ Tapered Edge Strip: Pre-cut tapered polyisocyanurate (polyiso) roof insulation edge strip fabricated of factory cut Tapered ACFoam®-II.1. Compliance:

a. ACFoam®-II faced product: Tapered or Flat closed-cell polyisocyanurate (polyiso) foam core integrally bonded to non-asphaltic, fiber-reinforced organic felt facers.1) ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2 (20 psi) or Grade

3 (25 psi).2) CAN/ULC-S704 Type 2, Class 3 or Type 3, Class 3.3) CCMC No. 12464-L.4) UL Certified for Canada- Insulated Roof Deck Assemblies


5) UL Standard 1256 Classification: Construction No. 120, 123 & 292.

6) UL Standard 790 (ASTM E108): Roofing Systems Classification.

7) UL Standard 263 (ASTM E119): Fire Resistance Classification.

8) UL Standard 1897: Uplift Resistance.9) FM Standard 4450 & 4470 Approved: Refer to FM

Approvals® RoofNav for Specific Systems Details.10) IBC Chapter 26 & National Building Code: Sections on

Foam Insulation.11) California State Insulation Quality Standards.12) Title 25 Foam Flammability Criteria (T 1231).13) Miami-Dade County Product Control Approved.14) State of Florida Product Approval: FL17989.15) Dimensional Stability (ASTM D2126): <2%.

PW1320-A




PAGE 9 of 10

16) Compressive Strength (ASTM D1621): 20 psi (140 kPa) or 25 psi (172 kPa).

17) Water Absorption (ASTM C209): <1.5%.18) Water Absorption (ASTM D2842): <3.5%.19) Water Vapor Transmission (ASTM E96): <1.5 perm

(85.5ng/(Pa•s•m2))20) Product Density (ASTM D1622): Nominal 2.0 pcf (32.04

kg/m3).21) Flame Spread (ASTM E84 10 min.): 40-60.22) Smoke Development (ASTM E84 10 min.): 50-170.23) Tensile Strength (ASTM D1623): >730 psf (35 kPa).24) Service Temperature: -100°F to +250°F.

b. 1.5” Tapered Edge Stip: TES1.51) Facer Availability: ACFoam®-II2) Slope: 1.5” (38.1mm) per ft.3) Minimum Thickness: 0.0” (0.0mm)4) Maximum thickness: 1.5” (38.1mm)5) Width: 12.0” (305mm)6) Length: 8.0’ (2440mm)

c. 2.0” Tapered Edge Strip: TES2.01) Facer Availability: ACFoam®-II or ACFoam®-III2) Slope: 1.0” (25.4mm) per ft.3) Minimum Thickness: 0.0” (0.0mm)4) Maximum thickness: 2.0” (50.8mm)5) Width: 24.0” (610mm)6) Length: 8.0’ (2440mm)


3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roof deck for suitability to receive insulation.

B. Verify that substrate is dry, clean and free of foreign material that will damage insulation or impede installation.

C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

D. Verify that roof drains, scuppers, roof curbs, nailers, equipment supports, vents and other roof accessories are secured properly and installed in conformance with Contract Documents.

E. Verify that deck is structurally sound to support installers, materials and equipment without damaging or deforming work.1. Start of installation indicates installer accepts conditions of existing deck

surfaces.

PW1320-A




PAGE 10 of 10

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

C. Verify the manufacturer’s roof edge details for accuracy to fit the assembly.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.

B. Install specified insulation using approved mechanical fasteners, hot asphalt or adhesives in accordance with manufacturer’s latest written instructions and as required by governing codes and Owner’s insurance carrier.

C. Install with end joints staggered to avoid having insulation joints coinciding with joints in deck. In multi-layer installations, stagger joints in top and bottom layers.

3.04 PROTECTION

A. Remove trash and construction debris from insulation surface prior to application of roofing membrane.

B. Do not leave installed insulation exposed to weather. Cover and waterproof completed roof system immediately after installation.1. Temporarily seal exposed insulation edges at the end of each day.2. Remove and replace installed insulation that has become wet or

damaged with new insulation.

C. Protect installed insulation and roof cover from traffic by use of protective covering materials during and after installation.

END OF DOCUMENT

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 07 54 00 PAGE 1 of 8

SECTION 07 54 00

THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY:

A. Install roof systems at Stockton Corporate Yard that correspond with roof areas shown on site map and scope of work.

1.02 SCOPE OF WORK:

A. Building A – Central Stores and Fuel Shack: 1. Remove existing roof system to wood deck. 2. Install one layer of 2-1/2” polyisocyanurate insulation. 3. Mechanically fasten one layer of 1/4” gypsum board directly over the

polyisocyanurate insulation. 4. Install mechanically fastened 80-Mil TPA/PVC membrane and associated

components of the single ply roof system. 5. Replace all wood blocks with rubber blocks. 6. Clean, prime, and coat interior gutter with polyurethane, fluid applied

coating. B. Contractor is responsible for taking the appropriate measures to protect the

building interior during the roofing project and will clean all debris that does enter the building. Photo logs with before and after pictures will be required.

C. Contractor will water test the roof upon project completion to verify that the roof is

draining properly and drains are functioning properly. Any areas of ponding water will need to be corrected unless City and Material Manufacturer were aware of the ponding water and authorized the roof installation at this location.

1.03 ROOF REMOVAL INSTRUCTIONS

A. All existing roof systems will be removed in accordance with the Hazardous Materials report and in compliance with State, Local, and Federal codes for removal of roof systems that contain hazardous materials.

B. Roof removal will include metal edging, gutters, wood blocks, roof jacks, and

other roof related components. Items to be re-used will be identified by prime contractor prior to mobilization of demolition contractor. Demolition contractor will clean these items and leave onsite for re-installation.

C. Roofing material will be removed down to the structural wood deck. Deck will be

free of all debris and vacuumed with a HEPA vacuum before new roof installation begins.

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFINGPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 07 54 00

PAGE 2 of 8

D. Demolition contractor will provide photo documentation of all rooms and walkways located below work areas prior to the start and upon completion of the demolition scope.

E. Interior of buildings will be protected with drop sheets suspended from the underside of the roof deck in order to catch all debris that filters through the roof decking during the tear off process.

F. Interior Decontamination:1. Demolition contractor will inspect building interiors periodically throughout

the demolition process and clean any visible debris. Wet wipe vertical and horizontal surfaces and HEPA vacuum the floor.

2. Demolition contractor will return after the roof is installed to remove the interior drop cloths and to perform another round of cleaning that will include wet wiping the horizontal and vertical surfaces and HEPA vacuuming the floors.

3. Any debris left in the interior is unacceptable.

G. Grounds will be swept with a magnet on a daily basis.

H. Lead Paint: All painted metal and wood will be treated as if it has lead paint and be handled in accordance with Local, State, and Federal regulations.

I. Demolition contractor shall adhere to good housekeeping practices throughout the project and keep the site clean and free of trash, debris, etc.

J. Notify CAL-OSHA, EPA, DTSC, and Air Quality Management City as needed. Demolition contractor will sign manifest as agent for Owner.

K. Provide complete close-out package upon project completion with notifications, clearance, waste manifests, etc…as applicable to each site.

1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section.

1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain watertight; do not permit the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

PW1320-A




PAGE 3 of 8

B. Spec Data Sheet on rubber pipe supports.

C. Spec Data Sheet for insulation.

D. Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install roofing system.

E. Warranties: Unexecuted copy of manufacturer’s warranty and service agreement.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's warranty.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications:1. A qualified manufacturer that has UL approval for roofing system identical

to that specified for this Project.

C. Manufacturer’s Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized full-time employee representative of manufacturer experienced in the installation and maintenance of the specified roofing system and qualified to determine Installer’s compliance with the requirements of this Project.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain all components for the roofing system from a single manufacturer or obtain approved in writing prior to submitting bids from the Architect and Owner of acceptance by the roofing system manufacturer.


A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.

1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

B. Contractor shall be responsible to maintain all interior spaces below area of work free of the affects of weather including rain or blowing debris for the duration of Work. Contractor shall schedule work according to published 10-day weather forecast and must update the schedule on a daily basis. Contractor is required to provide written updates to Owner and Architect for deviations from any previously published schedule.

PW1320-A




PAGE 4 of 8

1.10 WARRANTY

A. New Roof Component Coverage: The manufacturer’s warranty must include labor and material coverage against leakage on all components including those manufactured by others. A single manufacturer shall provide specified warranty for all roof systems components specified. This includes the single ply roofing systems, underlayment, insulation, and roof coatings. It also includes the following items:1. Included in the warranty coverage are the following:

a. Insulation materials, fasteners, and adhesives.b. All new and temporary roof membrane components and

adhesives.c. All metal edge components including cleat strips.d. All tapered edge and cant strips.e. All surface mastics, coatings, stripping, plies, etc.f. All drain and scupper flashing.g. Any roof leak or other problems caused by substrate movement of

any component other than the deck shall not be excluded.h. Any movement associated with metal edge joints of flanges

causing leaks.i. Damages caused by wind speed up to 74 miles per hour.j. Permanent tie-ins and/or control joints separating new and old

roofing.

2. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Installer’s Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section.1. Include all components of roofing system such as roofing membrane,

base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, and walkway products, and other components of the roofing systems.

2. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Annual Maintenance Warranty:1. Other roof areas on this site are currently covered by an “Annual

Tremcare Warranty” which must be maintained during and after this Work. The installed manufacturer’s materials must qualify to be added to this existing warranty.

2. Provide annual inspection program from roofing material manufacturer for 10 years to include the following:a. Annual inspection by Manufacturer employed technician.b. Removal of all debris from the roof and gutters.c. Repair of any visible defects.d. (800) number that is staffed 24 hours per day, 7 days per week to

report any leaks that may occur during the warranty period.e. Web-based program for access to inspection and repair reports,

photos, warranty documents, and roof drawings.

PW1320-A




PAGE 5 of 8

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 TRI-POLYMER ALLOY ROOFING MEMBRANE

A. Basis of Design: Membrane shall be Tremco Tri-polymer alloy membrane based on Dupont’s Elvaloy and blended with CPE and PVC.

B. Base bid is for 80-Mil membrane. Contractor will also provide deductive alternate for 60-mil membrane. See Section 01 22 00: Unit Pricing.

C. Known alternate materials meeting the design parameters include:1. GAF Materials Corporation – 1361 Alps Road, Wayne, NJ 074702. Contractor may submit substitution request for alternate manufacturer

under provisions of section 01 25 13 – Product Options and Substitutions.

2.02 INSULATION

A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces.

B. Gypsum Board: Glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate.1. Manufacturers:

a. Dens-Deckb. Securockc. Or equal

C. Refer to Section 07 22 00: Roof and Deck Insulation

2.03 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing.1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall meet VOC limits of authorities having

jurisdiction.

B. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer’s standard bonding adhesive for membrane base flashings.

C. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors.

D. Sealant: Manufacturer’s moisture cured, one-part, polyurethane sealant.

E. Gutter Coating Materials:1. ICE Coating or Equal.

PW1320-A




PAGE 6 of 8


3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, and notify owner of any deficiencies found before starting installation.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.

3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install roofing system in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Install roofing membrane, base flashings, and component materials in compliance with requirements in FMG 4450 and FMG 4470 as part of a membrane roofing system as listed in FMG’s “Approval Guide” for fire/windstorm classification indicated. Comply with recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49.

3.04 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.

B. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.

C. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water.

D. Install insulation in quantities and thickness as specified. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation.1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and

penetrations.

E. Mechanically fasten insulation assembly with 8 fasteners per board.

3.05 MECHANICALLY FASTENED SINGLE PLY INSTALLATION

A. Install roofing membrane over area to receive roofing according to membrane roofing system manufacturer’s written instructions. Unroll roofing membrane and allow to relax before installing.

1. Install sheet according to ASTM D 5036.

PW1320-A




PAGE 7 of 8

B. Start installation of roofing membrane in presence of membrane roofing system manufacturer’s technical personnel.

C. Accurately align roofing membrane and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.

D. Install two half sheets at the perimeter of the roof. Half sheets are fastened 6” on center and full field sheets are fastened 12” on center.

E. Apply roofing membrane with side laps shingled with roof slope of roof deck where possible.

F. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing membrane, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roofing membrane according to manufacturer’s written instructions to ensure a watertight installation.1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity.2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily and repair seam

sample areas.3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing membrane.

G. Base Flashing Installation: Apply solvent based bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply adhesive to seam areas of flashing.

H. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with sheet flashing. Use pre-manufactured cones where applicable.

I. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings.


A. Manufacturer’s Technical Representative: Approved contractor will engage manufacturer’s technical representative to perform roof tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.

B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Owner.1. Notify Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection.2. Contractor is required to complete all punch list items prior to payment

from owner and issuance of warranty.

C. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

PW1320-A




PAGE 8 of 8

E. Contractor will water test the roof upon project completion to verify that the roof has positive drainage and all drains are functioning properly. Any areas of ponding water will need to be corrected unless City and Material Manufacturer were aware of the issue and still authorized the roof installation.

END OF DOCUMENT

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON FLASHING AND SHEET METALPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 07 60 00

PAGE 1 of 7

SECTION 07 60 00

FLASHING AND SHEET METAL

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Related Documents: Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Sections apply to Work of this Section as if printed herein.

B. Section Includes: Description of requirements for materials, fabrications, and installation of flashing and sheet metal work, except that which is shown or specified to be provided elsewhere. Only major items are shown or noted. Work and/or items include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following:1. Roof flashings with galvanized finish2. Counterflashings over Roofing base flashings with galvanized finish3. Sheet metal pans and pitch pockets4. Counterflashings for roof mounted mechanical equipment, exhaust fans,

vent stacks, etc.5. Sheet metal for rooftop miscellaneous items, including crickets, etc.6. Galvanized sheet metal gutters with galvanized finish

C. RELATED SECTIONS1. Section 07 54 00: Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing2. Section 07 92 00: Joint Sealants3. Section 09 91 00: Painting4. Section 23: HVAC5. Section 26: Electrical

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ASTM B32 – Solder Metal

B. ASTM A167 – Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium Nickel Steel Plate

C. ASTM A525 – Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip Process

D. ASTM 832 – Solder Metal

E. FS 0 F 506 – Flux, Soldering, Paste and Liquid

F. FS SS C 153 – Cements Bituminous, Plastic

G. SMACNA – Architectural Sheet Metal Manual of the Sheet Metal and Air conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc., Latest Edition with all Bulletins

PW1320-A




PAGE 2 of 7

1.03 QUALITY CONTROL

A. References and Standards (Latest Edition unless otherwise noted):1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)2. American Welding Society, "Standard Welding Code (AWS); Sheet Steel

D1.33. Federal Standards (FS)4. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Inc.

(SMACNA); "Architectural Sheet Metal Standard", Latest Edition

1.04 SUBMITTALS (Submit under the provisions of Section 01 33 00)

A. Product Data: For manufactured items and proposed substitutions: Only as required by Architect. Submit specific plates from SMACNA manual consistent with and acceptable to documentation intended installation.

B. Describe material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, and installation details. All work to meet or exceed SMACNA standards or as detailed whichever is more restrictive.

C. Shop drawings per Section 01 33 00.

1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use.

B. Discharge materials carefully and store on clean concrete surface or raised platform in safe, dry area. Do not dump onto ground.

C. Stack preformed materials to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion and to provide ventilation.

1.06 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Protection:1. At all times against damage or contamination during the Work. Do not

use damaged or distorted items in the Work.2. Exercise care when working on or about roof surfaces to avoid damaging

or puncturing roofing membrane.3. Protect exposed finishes as required against construction damage;

remove prior to final inspection.

B. Scheduling, Sequencing: Insure timely delivery of items to be embedded in work of other sections and furnish setting instructions for exact installation.

C. Work under this section is to physically protect roofing and exterior from damage that would allow water leakage into the building interiors.

PW1320-A




PAGE 3 of 7


A. Applicator: Company specializing in sheet metal flashing work with a minimum of 10 years of experience.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Warranty period for this Work is extended to two (2) years against all defects in materials, workmanship and leaks. Warranty shall cover damage from leaks due to defective materials or workmanship. Warranty coverage shall be at 100% of all cost of defects and repairs to be borne by the contractor.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Sheet Metals:1. Galvanized Sheet Metal: ASTM A653, G 90, commercial quality, heavy

duty 20 gauge or greater, unless otherwise noted. Use hot-dip galvanized steel or cadmium plated fasteners.

2. Steel plates and flat bar stock shall have galvanized finish and conform to ASTM A36.

3. Pre-finished sheet metal flashing with Kynar coating.

B. Solder and Flux: Types as recommended by manufacturer of sheet metal to be soldered. Re-melted or re-worked solder will not be permitted. Solder: ANSI/ ASTM B32, Class AI. Flux: FS-0-F-506.

C. Asphaltic Primer: ASTM D41.

D. Plastic Cement: Asphaltic, FS SS-C-153, Type I, asphaltic base cement.

E. Sealants:1. Single Component Sealer: Conform to FS TT-S-00230C, Class A, Type

II, and/or ASTM C920 Type S, Grade NS, Class 25.2. One-Part Silicone Sealant that meets FS TT-S-00154A, Class A, and/or

ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50.3. Primer: As recommended by sealant manufacturer. Primer will be

required for all surfaces to receive sealant.4. Solvents, cleaning agents or other accessory materials shall be as

recommended by sealant manufacturer.

F. Packing and Wedges: Lead or other nonferrous alloys as approved by Architect.

G. Items for Permanent Protection of Dissimilar Metals and Materials:1. Sheet Membrane Waterproofing2. Bituminous Paint: FS TT-C-494A3. Compressible Tape: ASTM C509 – Closed cell black neoprene tape, size

as noted, with adhesive system as recommended by manufacturer.

PW1320-A




PAGE 4 of 7

H. Protective backing paint: FS-TT-C-494A, Bituminous paint

2.02 FABRICATION

A. General Requirements:1. Items of standard manufacture may be furnished in lieu of specially

fabricated items provided such items meet requirements shown or noted.2. As far as practicable, form and fabricate sheet metal items true to shape,

accurate in size, and square in shop. Where circumstances require on-site fabrication, provide quality equal to shop work.

3. Reproduce accurately to profiles and bends as shown or noted. Ensure that intersections are sharp, even, and true; that plane surfaces are free from buckles and waves; that seams follow direction of water flow.

4. Where work is not otherwise shown or noted, design and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA.

5. Reinforce properly as required for strength and appearance in longest practical lengths.

6. Cut, fit, and drill sheet metal as required to accommodate accessory items and work adjacent or adjoining.

7. Exposed Edges of Sheet Metal: Fold, bead, Hem or return; no raw edges will be permitted. Miter and seam all corners and expansion joints.

8. Fabricate cleats and starter strips of same material as sheet metal gutters and cleats to be interlocking with sheet metal gutter.

B. Sheet Metal Joints:1. In general, provide lock joints; where impractical, lap, rivet, and solder.2. Turn lock joints on exposed surfaces in direction of flow.3. Miters joints and solder.4. Where positive joining is required, arc-weld in accordance with AWS

D1.1, or braze.5. Expansion joints shall provide soldered end cap at each gutter with sheet

metal cap over expansion gap.

C. Soldering:1. Pre-tin edges 1 1/2 inches both sides prior to soldering.2. Use heavy soldering coppers of blunt design (except for zinc alloy sheet

metal, use medium irons).3. Immediately after applying flux, solder slowly with well-heated coppers,

thoroughly heating seams and completely sweating solder through full width with at least one inch width along seams.

4. After soldering, immediately neutralize any acid flux and flush with clean water.

5. Do not solder aluminum.

D. Expansion-Contraction of Sheet Metal Runs: Provide loose locking slip joint at maximum of ten (10) feet, unless SMACNA recommends more frequent intervals. Flood gutter for 24 hours to verify all expansion joints are 100 percent water tight.

PW1320-A




PAGE 5 of 7

E. Flashing and Counterflashing:1. Fabricate runs in maximum lengths subject to expansion/contraction

allowance with minimum number of joints.2. Form counterflashings to lock rigidly into reglets where required.3. Exposed Edges: Turn back and hem 1/2 inch.

2.03 FINISHES

A. Sheet Metal: Manufacturer's standard finish unless otherwise noted herein.1. Sheet Metal: Field paint all surfaces of sheet metal not receiving

elastomeric coating identified below.a. Painting shall be in accordance with Section 09 91 00: Painting.

2. All surfaces of gutters, downspouts, flashings, etc. shall be factory galvanized or field toughed up.

3. Coated metal: Refer to Section 07 54 00: Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing for factory coated metal flashing to be used at all roofing system details.

B. Permanent Protection of Dissimilar Metals and Materials:1. Items in Contact with Dissimilar Metals: Protect as required to prevent

corrosion and discoloration from galvanic action.2. Items in Contact with Concrete, Masonry Mortar, or No Accessible Alter

Installation: Underlay items with asphalt-saturated felt or apply heavy coating of bituminous paint at areas of contact.

3. Items in Contact with Moisture Absorbent Materials or Preservative-Treated Wood: Apply heavy coating or bituminous paint to such items.

4. Fasteners and Anchors of Materials Dissimilar from Item Fastened: Mask as required to prevent corrosion and discoloration from galvanic action.

5. Contractor to verify with painting contractor that the primer is compatible with finish coats of paint at exposed flashings, caps, etc. to be finished painted.

C. Interior coating of gutters:1. After gutters are installed and before flood testing, contractor shall coat

interior of gutter with elastomeric roofing coating per Section 07 54 00: Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing.


3.01 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas to receive items and verify the following:1. All shapes and dimensions of surface to be covered.2. That substrates, adjacent or adjoining surfaces are clean, dry and

reasonably smooth, and free from defects to extend needed for sheet metal work.

3. That wood surfaces to be in contact with sheet metal are free from projecting nails.

PW1320-A




PAGE 6 of 7

4. Absence of other conditions that will adversely affect installation.

B. Do not start work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate as required with installation of related work.

B. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work.

C. Install starter edge strips and cleats prior to starting.

D. Install reglets true to lines and plumb or levels. Seal top of reglets with sealant.

E. Insert flashing into reglets to form tight fit. Secure in place with plastic wedges at maximum 12 inches on center. Seal flashings into reglets with sealant.

F. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only in locations approved by Architect.

G. Lock and seal all joints.

H. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings.

I. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles.

J. Solder metal joints watertight for full metal surface contact. After soldering, wash metal clean with neutralizing solution and rinse with water.

K. Seal metal joints watertight.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General Requirements:1. Install items in accordance with SMACNA unless otherwise indicated.2. Standard Catalog Products: Install in strict accordance with approved

manufacturer's instructions unless otherwise indicated.3. Where installation requires performing work of fabrication, meet

requirements of applicable standards of Fabrication Article.4. Apply flashing compound at slip joints or wherever else metal to metal

contact occurs and movement may be anticipated.5. Sheet metal installed in conjunction with roofing shall be installed in

accordance with the roofing manufacturer's recommendation and requirements or specification whichever is more restrictive.

6. Insure that items are installed in true and accurate alignment with other items and related work; that joints are accurately fitted; that exposed

PW1320-A




PAGE 7 of 7

surfaces are free from dents; that corners are reinforced; that seams are watertight.

7. All work shall be left free of oil, grease or acid, ready to receive painter's finish.

8. Wherever possible, all fasteners shall be concealed. All exposed fasteners shall have neoprene gaskets and capped with a bead of sealant.

B. Flashing and Counterflashing:1. Install in reglets to form tight fit. Secure in place with lead wedges. Seal

flashings into reglets with sealant.2. Apply a continuous bead of sealant (compatible with membrane roofing

material) along the bottom edge of flashings (or counterflashings).

C. Miscellaneous Items: Fabricate and install all other miscellaneous sheet metal, flashings, counterflashings, reglets, etc. as detailed, indicated or required to complete the work. Furnish and install all other miscellaneous ferrous and nonferrous sheet metal items as indicated, except where such items are specified to be included under other Sections of the Specifications. Finish shall match similar items or adjacent surfaces.

3.04 SEALANTS

A. Surface of joints and spaces to be sealed shall be dry and free from dust, dirt and foreign matter. All oils and films of any nature shall be removed.1. Prepare surfaces to which the sealants are to bond to priming with primer

or surface conditioner manufactured in any joint or on any surface that has not been cleaned and primed or conditioned.

2. Provide backup or filler material to all joints or spaces having a depth greater than 3/8".

3. Apply sealants in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and applicable portions of Section 07 92 00. Sealants shall be applied to both sides of all joints or space unless indicated otherwise. Remove excess sealant and leave surfaces neat and clean and with a uniform smooth finish on the sealant.

3.05 TOUCH-UP

A. Where finish is damaged by fabrication or installation, repair galvanized, pre-finished and prime painted surfaces with specified touch-up material, applying in accordance with manufacturer's printed directions. Float galvanized material full, grind, and buff smooth.

END OF DOCUMENT

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON ROOF ACCESSORIESPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 07 72 00

PAGE 1 of 3

SECTION 07 72 00

ROOF ACCESSORIES

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. The work covered by this specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials and accessories, and performing all operations required for the correct installation of recycled rubber pipe [conduit] supports for mechanical piping [electrical conduit] systems.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A653 G90 SS Gr. 33 – Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dipped Process

B. ASTM B633 – Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel

C. ASTM C531 – Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfaces, and Polymer Concretes

D. ASTM C642 – Test Method for Specific Gravity, Absorption, and Voids in Hardened Concrete

E. ASTM C672 – Test Methods for Scaling Resistance of Concrete Surfaces Exposed to Deicing Chemicals

F. ASTM D412 – Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers – Tension

G. ASTM D395 – Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property – Compression Set

H. ASTM D573 – Test Method for Rubber – Deterioration in an Air Oven

I. ASTM D746 – Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact

J. ASTM D2240 – Test Method for Rubber Property – Durometer Hardness

K. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code

PW1320-A




PAGE 2 of 3


A. Rubber / steel pipe and conduit supports shall be manufactured under a strict quality control program assuring quality product delivered to the jobsite. Pipe supports that are damaged shall not be installed.

B. Workmanship: All pipe and conduit supports to be installed by a qualified contractor and installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.1. All work shall comply with all applicable federal, state, and local codes

and laws having jurisdiction.2. All work shall conform to accepted industry and trade standards for pipe

support [conduit] installations.

C. The installation of the rubber / steel supports blocks shall also comply with the requirements of the roofing system manufacturer. See section 07 54 00: Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with these specifications, pipe support systems shall be:1. “Dura-Blok” design as supplied by Cooper B-Line, Inc.2. “C” and “CW” Series design as supplied by C-Port of Clearline

Technologies3. Pre-approved equal as reviewed by the Architect and Owner per section

01 25 13: Product Options and Substitutions.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Curb base must be made of 100% recycled rubber and polyurethane prepolymer with a uniform load capacity of a minimum of 500 pounds per linear foot of support. In addition, each base shall have a reflective stripe.

B. Minimum Dimensions: 6-inches wide by 4 inches tall by 9.6 inches long or 12 inches wide by 2 5/8 inches tall by 12 inches long for the rubber block itself.

C. Steel frame: Steel, 14ga strut galvanized per ASTM A653 or 12ga strut galvanized per ASTM A653 for bridge series. Strut height to be selected from standard strut models as required for the elevation of the pipe / conduit required.

D. Attaching hardware: Zinc-plated threaded rod, nuts, and attaching hardware per ASTM B633.

E. Any products claiming to be a similar, like, or equal must demonstrate (meet or exceed) the same physical and performance characteristics as specified below:1. Density: 0.52 oz/cu in per ASTM C6422. Durometer Hardness: 67.2A ± 1 per ASTM D2240

PW1320-A




PAGE 3 of 3

3. Tensile Strength: 231 psi minimum per ASTM D4124. Compression Deformation: 5% at 70psi and 72ºF per ASTM D3955. Brittleness at Low Temp: -50ºF per ASTM D7466. Freeze and thaw when exposed to deicing chemicals: No loss after 50

cycles per ASTM C6727. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion: 8 x 10 - 6 in/in/ºF (min) per ASTM

C5318. Weathering: 70 hours at 120ºF per ASTM D573

a. Hardness retained: 100% (±5%)b. Compressive strength: 100% (±5%)c. Tensile strength: 100% (±5%)d. Elongation retained: 100% (±5%)


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.

B. If gravel top roof, gravel must be removed around and under pipe support.

C. Always consult roofing manufacturer for roof membrane compression capacities. If necessary, a compatible sheet of roofing material (rubber pad) may be installed under rooftop support to disperse concentrated loads and add further membrane protection.

D. Gas pipe spacing subject to local gas authorities.

E. Use properly sized clamps to suit pipe [conduit] sizes.

END OF DOCUMENT

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON SEALANTS AND CAULKINGPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 07 92 00

PAGE 1 of 5

SECTION 07 92 00

SEALANTS AND CAULKING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Related Documents: Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section as if printed herein.

B. Section Includes: Description of requirements for materials, fabrications and installation of sealants, caulking and associated accessories, except for those specified in other Sections, where indicated on Drawings, and where required to provide for a weather and watertight condition shall be furnished and installed under this section of the specifications.

C. Related Sections:1. Section 06 10 00: Rough Carpentry2. Section 07 54 00: Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing3. Section 07 60 00: Flashing and Sheet Metal4. Section 09 91 00: Painting5. Division 22: Plumbing6. Division 26: Electrical


A. Referenced and Standards:1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)2. Federal Specifications

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Dow Corning; General Electric; Tremco; Vulkem, 3M.

C. Applicator's Qualifications: Application of sealants shall be by firm regularly engaged in this type of work and approved by the manufacturer, employing skilled mechanics who are skilled in the application of sealants and caulking herein specified.

D. Job Mock-up: Prepare sample application in locations directed by Architect. The Mock-up will constitute the standard of acceptance for work for this project.

E. Compatibility: Contractor to verify that all sealants and caulking are compatible with adjacent finishes.

1.03 SUBMITTALS (Submit per section 01 33 00)

A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit list of materials proposed for use including complete data including color charts and manufacturer’s specifications and

PW1320-A




PAGE 2 of 5

installation instructions for each type of sealant, caulking compound and associated miscellaneous material required. Include published data, letter of certification, or certified test laboratory report indicating that each material complies with the requirements and is intended generally for the application shown. Include location of each material.

B. Samples: Submit standard color ranges of exposed materials for Owner's selection.


A. Materials shall be delivered to job in sealed containers with manufacturer's name, labels, project identification, and lot numbers where appropriate.

B. Store material out of weather in original containers or unopened packages as recommended by manufacturer.

1.05 JOB AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Job Conditions: The Sealant and Caulking Contractor shall acquaint himself with all conditions relating to the work of this Section.

B. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of sealants under adverse weather conditions or when temperatures are below or above manufacturer's recommended limitations for installation. Proceed with the work only when forecasted weather conditions are favorable for proper cure and development of High Early Bond strength.

1.06 WARRANTY

Warranty period for this work is extended to ten (10) years for materials; and workmanship against leakage for two (2) years.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Sealants: Sealants shall be polysulfide, polyurethane, or silicone elastomeric type sealants all conforming to the following specifications.1. Single-component sealants shall conform to FS TT-S-00230C, Class A,

Type II, and/or ASTM C920-79, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25.2. Multi-component sealants shall conform to FS TT-S-00227E, Class A,

Type I (self-leveling) or Type II, and/or ASTM C920-79, Type M, Grade P or NS, Class 25.

3. One-part silicone sealant that meets FS TT-S-001543, Class A, and/or ASTM C920-75, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50.a. Do not use silicone sealant in seismic joints or horizontal joints in

sidewalks, terraces, decks, concrete and tile floors, and driveways.

PW1320-A




PAGE 3 of 5

4. All exposed sealant material shall be of a color acceptable to Architect or shall be a paintable type where directed.

B. Primer: As recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Primer will be required for all surfaces to receive sealants.

C. Backup Materials: Non-staining, compatible with sealant and primer, and of a resilient nature such as closed cell resilient foam, sponge rubber, polyvinyl chloride tubing or glass mat. Materials impregnated with oil, bitumen or similar materials shall not be used. Sealants shall adhere to backup material.

D. Bond Breaker: Polyethylene tape or masking tape as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.

E. Solvents, Cleaning Agents: and other accessory materials shall be as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.

F. Caulking: Where specifically called for on the Drawings, shall be "Plastoid" Type C, Pabco "White Hydroseal", or approved equal conforming to Fed.Spec. TT-C-00598C.

G. Color of sealant shall match adjacent surface to which it is applied or shall be as selected by the Owner. Use non-sag type sealant on vertical surfaces.


3.01 INSPECTION

A. Surface Acceptance: Examine all surfaces to be sealed or caulked for acceptance.1. Joint dimensions shall be inspected and reviewed to verify that they are in

conformance with specifications and manufacturer's requirements and are acceptable to receive sealant and backup materials.

2. Joints shall be of sufficient width and depth to accommodate specified backup material or preformed joint filler and sealants, but in no case shall sealant application be less than 1/4" wide and 1/4" deep, except as recommended by the manufacturer or otherwise approved by the Architect.

B. Do Not seal or caulk joints until they are in compliance with requirements of the approved manufacturer of materials, the details as shown on the drawings and the specified requirements of other sections of the specifications.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. General: Thoroughly clean all joints, removing all foreign matter such as dust, oil, grease, water, surface dirt, etc. Sealant must be applied to the base surface.

PW1320-A




PAGE 4 of 5

B. Porous Material such as concrete or masonry shall be cleaned where necessary by grinding, sand or water blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, acid washing, or a combination of these methods as required to provide a clean, sound base surface for sealant adhesion.1. Laitance shall be removed by acid washing, grinding or mechanical

abrading.2. Form oils, release agents or chemical retardants shall be removed by

sand or water blast cleaning.3. Loose particle present or resulting from grinding, abrading or blast

cleaning shall be removed by blowing out joints with compressed air (oil-free) prior to application of primer or sealant.

4. Sealants shall not be applied to masonry joints where water repellent or masonry preservative has been applied. Waterproofing treatments shall be applied after sealants and caulking when called for.

C. Nonporous Surfaces such as metal and glass shall be cleaned either mechanically or chemically. Protective coatings on metallic surfaces shall be removed by a solvent that leaves no residue. Solvent shall be used with clean white cloths or lint free paper towels and wiped dry with clean, dry white cloths or lint free paper towels. Do not allow solvent to air dry without wiping. Joint areas protected with masking tape or strippable films shall be cleaned as above after removal of tape or film.

D. Sealant Preparation: Do not modify the sealant by addition of liquids, solvents or powders. Mix multi-component elastomeric sealants in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.

3.03 APPLICATION:

A. Back Up: Install backup material or joint filler of type and size specified at proper depth in joint to provide sealant dimensions as detailed or as recommended by the manufacturer. Backup material shall be of suitable size and shape so that when compressed (25 to 50 percent), it will fit in joints as required. Sealant shall not be applied without backup material and, if necessary, bond breaker strip. When using backup of hose or rid stock, roll the material into the joint to avoid lengthwise stretching. Hose or rod stock shall not be twisted or braided.

B. Bond Breaker: Use specified bond breaker strip between sealant and supporting type backup material. Bond breaker strip shall be used in all joints where sufficient room for backup does not exist or where required to prevent sealant bonding to undesirable surfaces.

C. Apply Masking Tape: Where required, in continuous strips in alignment with joint edge. Remove tape immediately after joints have been sealed and tooled as directed.

E. Prime surfaces to receive joint sealant with primer as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Do not apply primer to exposed finish surfaces.

PW1320-A




PAGE 5 of 5

F. Sealant: Do not use a sealant compound that has exceeded its shelf life or has become too jelled to be discharged in a continuous flow from the gun.1. Apply sealant with a caulking gun, using proper nozzles. Use sufficient

pressure to properly fill the joints with sealant to the back-up material.2. After joints have been completely filled, they shall be neatly tooled to

eliminate air pockets or voids and to provide a smooth, neat appearing finish in intimate contact with interfaces. After tooling, surface at sealant shall be free of ridges, wrinkles, sags, air pockets and embedded impurities. When tooling white or light colored sealants, use clean water, wet or dry tool or tooling solution recommended by sealant manufacturer.

3.04 CLEAN-UP

A. Immediately clean adjacent surfaces free of sealant or soiling resulting from this work as work progresses. Use a solvent or cleaning agent as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. All finished work shall be left in a neat, clean condition.

B. Remove masking tape immediately after tooling joints, leaving finished work in a neat and clean condition.

C. Upon completion of the work of this section, remove all resulting surplus materials, rubbish and debris from the premises.

END OF DOCUMENT

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON PAINTINGSPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 09 91 00

PAGE 1 of 8

SECTION 09 91 00

PAINTING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Related Documents: Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section as if printed herein.

B. Section Includes: Description of requirements for materials and application of paints and finishes for surfaces applied at job site, except those specifically excluded under Sub-paragraph 2 below.1. Work includes, but is not limited to, painting of following items, materials,

and spaces:a. All masonry walls or concrete in areas affected by the scope of

work not specifically prefinished or noted to remain unfinished.b. Gutters, downspouts, and downspout attachments.c. Flashings not coated in elastomeric coating or roofing membrane.

2. Work does not include painting following items, materials or spaces:a. Finished metal, such as stainless steel, chromium plated, bronze,

aluminum, and similar finished materials, unless indicated otherwise.

b. Factory-finished materials, such as clay tiles, etc. unless otherwise specified.

3. Surfaces for which painting is prohibited:a. Do not paint over any code-required labels, such as Underwriters'

Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification, performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates, fire alarm devices, fire sprinkler heads, etc.

b. Elastomeric sealants or silicone sealants not designed for painting.

D. Definitions:1. The term "paint" as used throughout these Specifications includes

emulsions, enamels, paints, stains, varnishes, sealers, fillers and other coatings whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coat.

2. Factory Finish: Factory-applied painting system consisting of primer and finish coats.

E. Related Sections:1. 05 52 00: Metal Railings2. 07 60 00: Flashings and Sheet Metal3. 07 92 00: Sealants and Caulking4. The requirements of Division 01 apply to the Work of this Section.

PW1320-A




PAGE 2 of 8


A. Applicator's Qualifications: All application of paint shall be done only by an application firm normally engaged in this business. All work shall be performed by qualified mechanics working under the supervision of an experienced supervisor.

B. Paint Coordination: Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime coats used. Review other Sections of these Specifications in which prime paints are provided to ensure compatibility of total coatings system for various substrates. Upon request from other subcontractors, furnish information characteristics of finish materials proposed for use, to ensure that compatible prime coats are used. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and re-prime as required. Notify Architect in writing of any anticipated problems using coating systems as specified with substrates primed by others.

C. Compliance to EPA Policy: Furnish certification that all paint coatings furnished for project comply with the EPA Clean Air Act for permissible levels of volatile organic content for architectural coatings applied in California as designated by California Air Resources Board (CARB).

1.03 SUBMITTALS (Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00 Submittals)

A. Manufacturer's Data: Manufacturer's technical information describing products, including paint label analysis and application instructions for each material proposed for use. Reference literature to the Architect's material numbers and painting systems. Include manufacturer's statement that components are appropriate to each Painting System.

B. Samples: Selection of colors and finishes will be made by the Architect from samples submitted for his review and approval. Samples to be 8 inches x 10 inches in size, hand deliver brushed for each color selected.


A. All materials shall be delivered to the site and stored in their original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Labels shall contain the following information:1. Name or title of material2. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.3. Manufacturer's name4. Contents by volume, for major pigments and vehicle constituents.5. Thinning and mixing instructions.6. Application instructions.7. Color name and number.8. Clean up instruction.

PW1320-A




PAGE 3 of 8

B. Store all painting materials and equipment not in immediate use in areas assigned for that purpose. Store paints in ventilated area at minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F.

1.05 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements:1. Apply water-base paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted

and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 degrees F and 90 degrees F unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer printed instructions.

2. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 degrees F and 95 degrees F, unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions.

3. Apply paint under dry and dust-free conditions. Do not apply paint in rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85%; or to damp or wet surfaces; unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions.

4. Painting may be continued during inclement weather only if areas and surfaces to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by paint manufacturer during application and drying periods.

5. Provide adequate ventilation so that humidity cannot rise above the dew point of the walls.

B. Illumination: Perform work under adequate and approved lighting conditions.

C. Protection: Properly protect floors and other adjacent work by drop cloths or approved coverings during painting operations.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Warranty period shall be one (1) year for interior painting against paint failure due to surface conditions, oxidation, fading, for both materials and application. Any failure shall be repainted to new condition by contractor at no cost to the Owner.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Materials for use on this project shall be "best" grade products of the types specified and listed below as regularly manufactured by the specified paint and varnish manufacturer. Materials not bearing the manufacturer's identification as standard "best" grade product of his regular line will not be considered for use. Materials listed hereunder are taken from various manufacturers listed above and shall be used as the standard required.

B. Manufacturer's offering products, which comply with requirements of these Specifications, include the following: Dunn-Edwards, PPG, and Kelly-Moore.

PW1320-A




PAGE 4 of 8

Products listed below are from the Kelly Moore product line as a point of reference for make-up, quality, and performance.

C. Materials (including primers, sealants and undercoats) selected for use for each type of surface shall be the product of a single manufacturer as listed above wherever possible. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only to recommended limits.

D. Cleaning Solvent: Steel Structures Painting Council SSPC-SP1 1.

E. Ferrous Metal Cleaner: Phosphoric acid (Fed. Spec. MIL-C-19329) shall be composed of phosphoric acid (85 percent) - parts maximum, and isopropyl alcohol - 15 parts.

F. Galvanized Iron Cleaner: Acid wash, Galvaprime. Dilute with water according to the manufacturer's recommendations.

G. Linseed Oil: Boiled type, complying with Fed. Spec. TT-O-364.

H. Paint Materials: Refer to "Painting Schedules" hereinafter for paint products or materials and number of coats to be applied as finishes to surfaces on this project. Product numbers listed are as manufactured by Dunn-Edwards unless indicated otherwise (equivalent products of other manufacturers listed hereinbefore are also acceptable).

2.02 MIXING

A. Color-tint sealers and undercoats to correspond with finish color. Vary color of successive coats sufficiently to distinguish between coats.

B. Obtain the Architect's approval for adjustments of color on job.

C. Do not reduce any material unless directed to do so by the Architect, or unless recommended by materials manufacturer.


3.01 INSPECTION

A. Applicator must examine areas and conditions under which painting work is to be performed and notify Contractor in writing, with a copy to Architect, of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to applicator.

B. Application of the first coat of any finishing process shall constitute applicator's acceptance of surfaces within any particular area except gypsum wallboard, which shall be inspected after painter applies the seal coat.

PW1320-A




PAGE 5 of 8

C. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, loose cement plaster, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental to formation of durable paint film.

3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. General:1. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in strict accordance with

paint manufacturer's instructions and as herein specified, for each particular substrate condition.

2. Remove items not to be finished painted, or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting operations. Reinstall removed items by workmen skilled in trades involved.

3. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil and grease with clean cloths and cleaning solvents prior to mechanical cleaning. Program cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants from cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.

B. All Ferrous Surfaces required to be painted under this section shall be cleaned and treated as follows:1. Clean all rust, loose mill scale, grease, dirt, wax, old sealants, caulking

and other deleterious matter by any effective means and treat with phosphoric acid or chemical etching compound as specified under "Materials". Rinse with water and dry thoroughly.

2. Abraded or corroded spots on shop-coated surfaces shall be wire brushed and touched up with material similar to shop coat. Special care shall be exercised to remove wax, lubricants, and other coatings from roll-form coated metals prior to painting.

C. Galvanized and Zinc-Copper-Alloy Surfaces to be painted shall be solvent cleaned in accordance with Steel Structures Council Painting specification SSPC-SP 1-63 and treated with acid wash as specified under Article 2.01 herein.

D. Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Surfaces to be painted shall be solvent cleaned to remove oil and grease and then treated with chromate metal primer as herein specified. Cleaning solvents and procedures shall conform to the Steel Structures Council Painting Specification SSPC-I-63.

E. Equipment Installed with Factory Finish: Sand or etch finished surface to increase adherence of finish coats specified to be applied over factory finish.

F. Other Surfaces: Prepare surface as recommended by paint manufacturer.

3.03 MATERIALS PREPARATION

A. Mix and prepare painting materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions in room or area assigned for that purpose.1. Floor slabs used for storage and mixing of any paint materials shall be

protected by temporary coverings that will not permit penetration or

PW1320-A




PAGE 6 of 8

saturation of paint materials. Painting contractor shall be solely responsible for this protection.

B. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers used in storage, mixing, and application of paint in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

C. Stir materials before application to produce mixture of uniform density, and as required during application of materials. Do not stir film which, may form on surface into material. Remove film and if necessary, strain materials before using.

D. All necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent fire. Rags and waste soiled with paint shall be removed from the premises at the end of each day's work, or stored in metal containers with metal covers.

3.04 PAINT APPLICATION AND WORKMANSHIP

A. General: All work specified herein shall be of highest quality possible for the specified finish and for the surface to which the finish is applied and that which will provide maximum durability. Finished surfaces shall be free from runs, drips, ridges, waves, laps, brush marks and variation in color, texture and finish.1. Apply paint by brush, roller, spray, or other acceptable practice in

accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use brushes best suited for type of material being applied. Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high pile sheep's wool as recommended by paint manufacturer for material and texture required.

2. Number of coats and paint film thickness required is same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has completely dried.

3. Apply additional coats when undercoats, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, until paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Give special attention to insure that all surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

4. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently-fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

5. Paint back sides of access panels, removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.

6. Omit first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop primed and touch-up paint, unless otherwise indicated. Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to those items exposed in occupied spaces, except as otherwise specified or indicated.

B. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply each material at not less than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.

PW1320-A




PAGE 7 of 8

C. Scheduling Painting: Apply first-coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned, pre-treated or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.1. Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying.

Do not re-coat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of undercoat.

D. Prime Coats: Re-coat primed and sealed walls and ceiling where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat, to assure finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.

E. Pigmented (opaque) finishes: Completely cover to provide opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage.

F. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and re-distribute paint to even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling such as laps, irregularities in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections.

G. Brush Application: Brush-out and work brush coats onto surfaces in even film. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. Neatly draw all glass and color break lines.1. Brush apply primer or first coats, unless otherwise permitted to use

mechanical applicators.

H. Mechanical Applicators: Use mechanical methods for paint application when permitted by governing ordinances and trade union regulations. If permitted, limit to only those surfaces impracticable for brush applications.1. Limit roller application (generally) to interior wall and ceiling finishes for

second and third coats. Apply each roller coat to provide equivalent hiding as brush-applied coats.

2. Confine spray application (generally) to metal work, and similar surfaces where hand brush work would be inferior, and other surfaces specifically recommended by paint manufacturer. Respirators shall be worn by all persons engaged in or assisting in spray painting operations.a. Wherever spray applications is used, apply each coat to provide

equivalent hiding of brush-applied coast. Do not double back with spray equipment for purpose of building up film thickness of tow coats in one pass.

I. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements.

3.05 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULING

A. Surfaces Not Required to be Painted: Refer to Paragraph 1.01.B.2, above.

B. Interior Surfaces

PW1320-A




PAGE 8 of 8

All interiors shall be finished per the plans and specifications and at the direction of Owner. Contractor shall verify product and application with the Owner prior to bidding. Color to be determined by the Owner.1. Not Used

3.06 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULING

A. Surfaces Not Required to be Painted: Refer to Paragraph 1.01.B.2, above.

B. Exterior Surfaces

All exterior surfaces shall be finished per the plans and specifications and at the direction of Owner. Contractor shall verify product and application with the Owner prior to bidding. Color to be determined by the Owner.1. Steel – Galvanized (Metal railings, flashings, exposed electrical conduit,

downspouts)Surface prep per SSPC – SP1 Solvent Cleaning1 coat DTM Acrylic Primer (5725 DTM)2 coats 100% Acrylic Enamel, semi-gloss (1250 AcryShield)

2. Wood (Fascias, Beams, Siding)Sand chips or tear edges or seams smooth1 coat 100% Acrylic primer (255 AcryShield)2 coats 100% Acrylic Enamel, semi-gloss (1250 AcryShield)

3.07 SPECIAL PAINTING (NOT USED)

3.08 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS

A. Verify all exact locations to be painted with Architect.

END OF DOCUMENT

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON PLUMBING AND UTILITIES PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 22 05 00 PAGE 1 of 6

SECTION 22 05 00 PLUMBING AND UTILITIES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The requirements of the general conditions and Division 1 apply to all work hereunder;

also, applicable provisions of Section 23 05 00 Mechanical Work - General Requirements.

B. Furnish and install all plumbing work indicated on the Drawings and described herein.

Also, any incidental work not shown or specified necessary to provide the complete system.

1.02 SERVICES: A. Verify the location of all services. No extra cost shall be allowed if services are not as

shown. B. Determine storm and sanitary sewer elevation at point of connection before installing

any sewer piping. Notify Architect immediately if indicated grades cannot be maintained. 1.03 RECORD DRAWINGS: A print of the plumbing plan showing underground piping will be furnished by the

Contractor on which he shall indicate the locations of the underground installations as the work progresses. This shall be returned to Architect at completion of job.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CLEANOUTS: A. Cleanouts shall be "T" or "Y" branches or trap hubs of same material as pipe in which

they are placed. Cleanouts in cast iron lines shall have cast iron bodies with brass plugs. Cleanouts in floors and sidewalks shall be Josam 56010 or 56030, or equal, for ceramic tile floors with nickel bronze covers. Cleanouts in vertical lines shall be Josam 58710, or equal. Furnish cleanouts at ends of branch lines, at the base of vertical lines, at changes in direction and where shown or required to facilitate cleaning, a maximum spacing of 50' inside buildings, 100' outside, also in waste drop from each sink and urinal. Cleanout to grade shall be set in 14" x 14" x 5" deep concrete pad; trowel smooth and edge; set flush with finished grade. Cleanouts to be full size of line up to a maximum of 4". Cleanouts shall clear all obstructions by 18" minimum. Furnish to Owner one wrench for each size and type of cleanout used. Permanently identify exterior cleanouts: SS for sanitary sewer, SD for storm drain.

PW1320-A




2.02 PIPE AND FITTINGS INSIDE BUILDING: A. See General Requirements, Section 23 05 00, for dielectric fittings and pipe protection.

Terminate 5'-0" outside the building line or where marked. B. Soil, Storm, Waste and Vent Pipe underground and to 6" above ground: Service weight

cast iron soil pipe and fittings, asphaltic coated, conforming to Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Standard #301 ASTM A-888 or ASTM A-74 and so stamped. Joints shall be No-Hub conforming to Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Standard #310; Ty-Seal or equal with gaskets conforming to ASTM C 564 and ASTM A74.

C. Waste and Vent Pipe above ground from lavatories or sinks, rainwater leaders and

overflows above the floor: Cast iron soil pipe and fittings with no hub joints conforming to the requirements of CISPI Standard 301, ASTM A-888 or ASTM A-74 for all pipe and fittings. Joints shall conform to CISPI 310 and shall be hubless couplings composed of stainless steel shield, clamp assembly and elastomeric sealing sleeve. PVC DWV pipe and fittings is acceptable when approved. Condensate drains shall be Type M hard copper. Connect condensate drains to air conditioning units with P-trap and run to an approved receptor and dry well. Provide vibration eliminators at A.C. units.

D. Water Pipe (Hot and Cold Water): Type L copper tubing, hard temper, with wrought

copper fittings. Capped or plugged outlets shall be Schedule 40 screwed brass. Provide full solder cup fittings. ProPress fittings may be used if approved by Owner.

E. Gas Pipe, Oxygen and Acetylene: Schedule 40 black steel with malleable iron screwed

fittings above grade; welded below grade with Class 150 welding fittings. Connect to each item of gas-fired equipment with drip leg and valve. Provide flex connection in approved sizes where applicable.

F. Compressed Air Pipe: Type L copper tubing, hard temper, with wrought copper fittings.

Capped or plugged outlets shall be screwed brass. 2.03 PIPE AND FITTINGS OUTSIDE BUILDINGS: A. See General Requirements Section for dielectric fittings and pipe corrosive protection.

Connect to building services where terminated 5' outside footing line. B. Sanitary and Storm Drain Pipe: First quality, extra strength, bell and spigot clay sewer

pipe ASTM #C-700-789 with fittings conforming to ASTM C425-T, J-M PVC sewer pipe and fittings with Ring-Tite joints, ASTM D3034 SDR 35, or service weight cast iron where marked. Schedule 40 PVC-DWV.

C. Water Pipe in ground 2" and Larger: Schedule 80 PVC pressure pipe with solvent weld

fittings. Sizes 1-1/2" and smaller shall be Schedule 40 PVC pressure pipe with solvent weld fittings.

PW1320-A




D. Water Service Piping Above Grade: Class 150 bell and spigot ductile cast iron water pipe conforming to ANSI A21.6. Pipe shall be lined with a factory-applied 1/16" thick cement lining with smooth dense finish. Fittings shall conform to ANSI Specification A21-10-1952, Class 250 pattern. Fittings shall be lined. Provide concrete thrust block at each change of direction.

E. Gas Piping Aboveground to 18" Below Ground: Schedule 40 black steel with beveled

ends for welding, with Class 150 welding fittings. Mitering to form elbows or tees will not be permitted, where branch tee connections of welded piping are required Bonney "Weldolet" fittings may be used, if the branch is one-half of the diameter of the main or less. Provide gas service shut-off valve on downstream side of meter and at entry to each building conspicuously marked "GAS" with sign.

F. Gas Piping Underground: PLEXCO PE2406 polyethylene gas distribution pipe ASTM

D2513 and ASTM D2683 fittings with fusion welded joints. Pipe shall be labeled for NATURAL GAS in accordance with CPC.

At transition between polyethylene and steel piping below grade, provide Central

Plastics Company, or equal, Double "O" seal transition fittings. Provide minimum of 30 inches of horizontal steel pipe at all connections to above ground piping.

G. Drainage Pipe Perforated on Unperforated: J-M PVC drainage pipe and fittings or

nonreinforced concrete sewer pipe ASTM C14-63. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SERVICES: A. Determine storm and sanitary sewer elevation at point of connection before installing

any sewer piping. Notify Architect immediately if indicated grades cannot be maintained. 3.02 RECORD DRAWINGS: A. A print of the plumbing plan showing underground piping will be furnished to the

Contractor on which he shall indicate the locations of the underground installations as the work progresses. This shall be returned to the Architect at completion of job.

3.03 DISINFECTION: A. Clean and disinfect all hot and cold water systems connected to domestic water systems

in accordance with AWWA Standard C651 and as required by the local building and health department codes. This procedure shall be performed by a water treatment company that has a current Cal-EPA license to apply disinfectant chlorine in potable water.

PW1320-A




B. Preliminary Preparation: Provide a 1" service cock or valve connected to system at a point within 2'-0" of its junction with water supply line and inject disinfecting agent into system through this cock. When project is complete, with all fixtures connected and operable and ready for use and when, by test, system is proved to be free from leaks, it shall be thoroughly flushed by fully opening every outlet and operating every fixture until clear water flows from all of them.

C. Disinfecting Agent: The chlorine shall be a registered product with Cal-EPA for use in

California in potable water lines, such as Bacticide, Cal-EPA Registration No. 37982-20001.

D. Disinfecting Procedure: Connect a hand operated pump, 100 psi rating, minimum to the

1" service cock or valve. 1. With system completely full of water and supply valve open, adjust every faucet

of system so that a trickle of water flows from each. 2. Inject disinfectant until an orthotolidin test at each outlet shows a chlorine

residual concentration of at least 50 parts per million (p.p.m.). 3. Close all outlets and valves, including valve connecting to water supply line and

1" service cock on solution injection connection. Maintain condition for 24 hours and chlorine residual of 50 p.p.m. should be retained in system for this 24 hour period. If, after 24 hours, orthotolidin tests indicate that chlorine residual concentration has decreased below 50 p.p.m. then disinfection procedure must be repeated until an approved result is obtained.

4. When the above procedure has been completed, flush out entire system with

fresh water until an orthotolidin test at any outlet shows a residual of not more than 0.5 p.p.m.

5. Warning signs shall be provided at all outlets while chlorinating the system. 3.04 PIPING CONNECTION: A. Minimum grade on drain, vent, and waste piping shall be 1/4" per foot unless noted, or

later approved. Vent piping shall be graded to a soil or waste line. B. Special Equipment: 1. Certain items of equipment will be furnished and set in place under a separate

section of specifications; furnish all services and sink fittings and waste trap if required.

2. Make cold and hot water, drain, vent, and other required connections to all the

equipment. Each water connection shall have a valve and union in the line, unless noted otherwise.

PW1320-A




3. Sizes and locations of connection to special equipment are shown for equipment

made by certain manufacturers. Secure rough-in data from the manufacturer for the equipment to be installed and rough-in accordingly. Final connections shall conform to the manufacturer's directions for the equipment furnished at no extra cost to the Owner.

3.05 CLEANOUTS: A. Furnish cleanouts at ends of branch lines, at the base of vertical lines, at changes in

direction and where shown or required to facilitate cleaning, a maximum spacing of 50 feet inside buildings, 100 feet outside, also in waste drop from each sink. Cleanout to grade shall be set in a 14" x 14" x 5" deep concrete pad, trowel smooth and edge, set flush with finished grade. Cleanouts to be full size of line up to a maximum of 6". Cleanouts shall clear all obstructions by 18" minimum. Furnish to Owner one wrench for each size and type of cleanout used. Permanently identify cleanouts: SS for sanitary sewer.

3.06 FIXTURES AND TRIM: A. Install all fixtures at locations shown on architectural drawings. Provide proper backing

for hanging brackets and hold down screws 2 x 6 blocking secured with U.J.H. clips or carriers as specified. Grout voids between all fixtures and adjacent surfaces with clear Dow Silicon Sealant. Install hold down screws and wall hung lavatories.

B. All exposed piping, bibbs, stops, faucets, traps, flush valves and other trim for all fixtures

shall be chrome plated including piping inside sink cabinets. Provide Hudee rim for all counter type sinks and lavatories. Enameled ware shall be cast iron with acid resisting enamel.

C. Provide 85% or IPS red brass pipe, securely anchored to building construction, for each

connection to faucets, flush valves, stops, hose bibbs, etc. Each fixture except hose bibbs, shall have a stop valve installed on water supply lines to permit repairs without shutting off water mains.

D. Provide piston style water hammer arrestors at quick closing valves. E. Gas piping below covered walks and where noted on Drawings shall be installed in

watertight Schedule 40 PVC conduit. Conduit shall be vented where noted. F. Provide shut-off valve and solenoid valve in branch gas lines to each science lab, mount

wall switch were indicated. G. Provide ball valve and solenoid valve in branch air lines to each science lab, mount wall

switch were indicated.

PW1320-A




H. Install rainwater leaders, overflow drains and roof drains in accordance with the

architectural details. I. Provide Christy, Brooks, or equal, concrete pit, with size as noted on Drawings, or as

required, for water meter and detector check valve. J. Provide shut off valve and seismic gas valve on each gas branch line at gas meter. L. Provide expansion joint in gas piping at building seismic joints. END OF SECTION

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON MECHANICAL WORK – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 23 05 00 PAGE 1 of 18

SECTION 23 05 00 MECHANICAL WORK - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Conditions of Contract and Division 1 apply to this Section. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 INCLUSIONS: A. This section applies for all Division 22, and 23 mechanical sections. All conditions and

materials are pertinent to the other sections as if repeated in those sections. B. Furnish and install any incidental work not shown or specified which is necessary to

provide a complete and workable system. 1.02 DRAWINGS: A. Examine all Drawings prior to bidding of work and report any discrepancies in writing to

the Architect. For remodel work: Contractor shall visit the site of work and examine existing conditions

in order to become familiar with the scope. If dimensions are shown on the plans, they shall be verified at the site. Discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Architect. Failure to examine the site shall not constitute basis for claims for additional work because of lack of knowledge or location of hidden conditions which could affect the scope.

B. Drawings showing location of equipment, piping, ductwork, etc., are diagrammatic and

job conditions will not always permit their installation in the location shown. The Mechanical Drawings show the general arrangement of all piping, ductwork, equipment, etc., and shall be followed as closely as existing conditions, actual building construction and the work of other trades will permit. The Architectural and Structural Drawings shall be considered a part of the work insofar as these Drawings furnish the Contractor with information relating to design and construction of the building. Architectural Drawings shall take precedence over Mechanical Drawings. Because of the small scale of the Mechanical Drawing, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories which may be required. The Contractor shall investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting the work and shall arrange his work accordingly providing such fittings, valves and accessories as may be required to meet conditions. When job conditions do not permit installation of equipment, piping, ductwork, etc., in the locations shown, it shall be brought to the Architect's attention immediately and the relocation determined in a joint conference. Contractor will be held responsible for the relocation of any items without first obtaining the Architect's approval. Contractor shall remove and relocate such items at his own expense if so directed by the Architect.

C. Execute work mentioned in the Specifications and not shown on the Drawings, or vice

versa, the same as if specifically mentioned in both.

PW1320-A




1.03 CODES: A. Provide all work and materials in full accordance with the latest rules and regulations of

the California Code of Regulations (CCR), Title 21, Title 22, and Title 24, as applicable, Safety Orders of the Division of Industrial Safety, (Cal OSHA); the California Electric Code; the California Plumbing Code; the California Building Code; California Mechanical Code; State Fire Marshal; and other applicable laws or regulations. Nothing in these plans or specifications is to be construed to permit work not conforming to these codes. Furnish without extra charge, any additional material and labor required to comply with these rules and regulations.

B. Where material or equipment is specified to conform to standards such as American

Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM), Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., (UL), American National Standards Institute (ANSI) and the like, it shall be assumed that the most recent edition of the standard in effect at the time of bid shall be used.

1.04 FRAMING, CUTTING AND PATCHING: A. Special framing, recesses, chases and backing for work of this section, unless specified

otherwise, is covered under other sections. Be responsible for proper placement of all pipe sleeves, hangers and supports and location and sizing of openings for work of this section.

1.05 SUBSTITUTIONS AND MATERIAL LIST: A. Product names are used as standards of quality, items furnished as standard on

specified equipment shall be furnished on all substituted equipment at no extra cost to the contract regardless of disposition of submittal data; other materials or methods shall not be used unless approved in writing by the Architect. The burden of proof as to the equality of any proposed material shall be upon the Contractor; Architect's decision is final. Only one request for substitution shall be considered for each item. Equipment capacities specified are minimum acceptable. Submittals will not be accepted until compliance with the requirements of Contract Documents has been confirmed by the Contractor.

B. Unless stipulated otherwise in General Conditions and Division 1, submit a list of 7

copies of materials for approval within 35 days after the award of the Contract. It shall be accompanied by shop drawings, pump performance curves, fan curves, and other pertinent data, showing the size and capacity of the proposed materials. All materials to be used, whether substitutions or not, shall be listed in the order in which they appear in the specifications.

C. Any mechanical, electrical, structural or other changes required for the installation of any

approved substituted equipment shall be made to the satisfaction of the Architect and without additional cost to the Owner. Approval by the Architect of the substituted equipment and/or dimensional drawings does not waive these requirements. Upon

PW1320-A




request, submit drawings of mechanical equipment spaces showing substituted equipment before installation.

D. Review of material shall not be construed as authorizing any deviations from the

specifications unless the attention of the Architect has been directed to the specific deviations.

E. Furnish to the Project Representative, upon request, complete installation instructions on

all materials and equipment before starting installation of same. F. Submittals shall bear the specification reference or drawing location where they are

specified. Submittals shall not be accepted in incomplete form. Submittals shall be organized into booklets for each specification section and submitted in indexed loose leaf binders with notation when it is a deviation from the specifications.

G. Have fire damper installation instructions available at the site during construction for use

by the inspector. 1.06 SITE CONDITIONS: A. Information on the drawings relative to existing conditions is approximate only.

Deviations found necessary during progress of construction to conform to actual conditions, as approved by the Architect, shall be made without additional cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any damage caused to existing services. Promptly notify the Architect if services are found which are not shown on drawings.

1.07 GUARANTEE: A. Repair or replace any defective work, materials or part which may appear within 1 year

of the date of acceptance. This shall include damage by leaks. B. On failure to comply with the above guarantee within a reasonable length of time after

notification is given, the Architect shall have the repairs made at the Contractor's expense.

1.08 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS: A. Instruct the Owner's authorized representatives in operation, adjustment and

maintenance of all mechanical equipment and systems. Provide three copies of certificate signed by Owner's representatives attesting to their having been instructed.

B. Furnish three complete sets of operating and maintenance instructions bound in a

hardback binder and indexed. Start compiling the data upon approval of list of materials. Final observation will not be made until booklets are approved by Architect.

C. These sets shall incorporate the following:

PW1320-A




1. Complete operating instructions for each item of heating, ventilating, air

conditioning and plumbing equipment. 2. Test data and air and water balancing reports as specified. 3. Typewritten maintenance instructions for each item of equipment listing in detail

the lubricant to be used, frequency of lubrication, inspections required, adjustment, etc.

4. Manufacturer's bulletins with parts numbers, instructions, etc., for each item of

equipment, properly stripped and assembled. 5. Temperature control diagrams and literature. 6. A complete list or schedule of all major valves giving the number of the valve,

location and the rooms or area controlled by the valve. Identify each valve with a permanently attached metal tag stamped with number to match schedule. Post list in frame under plastic on wall in mechanical room or where directed.

1.09 RECORD DRAWINGS: A. Upon completion of the work and as a precedent to final payment, deliver to the

Architect originals of all Drawings showing the work exactly as installed. Also deliver to the Architect one complete set of reproducibles of all Drawings showing the work exactly as installed. All Record Drawings shall be signed by the Contractor verifying their accuracy.

1.10 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: A. All equipment, ducting and piping delivered to site shall be protected from the weather,

humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust and other contaminants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (OR MATERIALS) 2.01 GENERAL: A. Materials or equipment of the same type shall be of the same brand wherever possible.

All materials shall be new and in good condition. 2.02 ELECTRIC MOTORS: A. Shall be Allis-Chalmers, General Electric, Gould, Lincoln, or equal, selected for quiet

operation. Furnish motors with splashproof or weatherproof housings, where required or recommended by the manufacturer. Match the nameplate voltage rating with the electrical service supplied. Check electrical drawings. Provide a transformer for each

PW1320-A




motor not wound specifically for system voltage. The minimum efficiencies shall be as defined by IEEE 112 Test Method B and NEMA Standard MGI-112-53B.

2.03 MOTOR STARTERS: A. Furnish starters with the proper size thermal overload units, ambient compensated.

Provide 3-phase motor starters with 3-phase overloads. Magnetic starters shall have Hand-Off-Automatic switches and control transformers furnished integral with the starter when starter is serving an automatically controlled motor. Starters shall be Square D, Allen Bradley, or equal, in NEMA Type I enclosure inside and NEMA Type IIIR outside as required. Minimum starter size shall be 1.

2.04 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:

A. The work covered under this section consists of the furnishing of all necessary labor, supervision, materials, equipment, and services to completely execute the pipe hanger and supports as described in this specification. Piping shall be supported in such a manner as to maintain its alignment and prevent sagging.

B. REFERENCES:

1. 20113 CPC: pipe hangers and supports – materials, design, and manufacture.

C. QUALITY ASSURANCE:

1. Steel pipe hangers and supports shall have the manufacturers name, part

number, and applicable size stamped in the part itself for identification.

D. SUBMITTALS

1. Submit product data on all hanger and support devices. Product data to include, but limited to materials, finishes, approvals, load ratings, and dimensional information.

E. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

1. Manufacturer: subject to compliance with these specifications, pipe hanger and

support systems shall be as manufactured by TOLCO, inc., superstrut, b-line, or equal.

PW1320-A




F. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: Materials Types of Joints Horizontal Vertical Cast-Iron Hubless Shielded Coupling Every other joint,

unless over 4 feet then support each joint1,2,3,4

Base and each floor not to exceed 15 feet

Copper Tube and Pipe

Soldered or Brazed 1 ½ inches and smaller, 6 feet; 2 inches and larger, 10 feet

Each floor, not to exceed 10 feet5

Steel and Brass Pipe for Water or DWV

Threaded or Welded ¾ inch and smaller, 10 feet; 1 inch and larger, 12 feet

Every other floor, not to exceed 25 feet5

Steel, Brass, and Tinned Copper Pipe for Gas

Threaded or Welded ½ inch, 6 feet; ¾ inch and 1 inch, 8 feet; 1 ¼ inches and larger, 10 feet

½ inch, 6 feet; ¾ inch and 1 inch, 8 feet; 1 ¼ inches every floor level

Schedule 40 PVC and ABS DWV

Solvent Cemented All sizes, 4 feet; allow for expansion every 30 feet3,6

Base and each floor; provide mid-story guides; provide for expansion every 30 feet6

Notes: 1 Support adjacent to joint, not to exceed 18 inches (457 mm). 2 Brace not to exceed 40 foot (12 192 mm) intervals to prevent horizontal movement. 3 Support at each horizontal branch connection. 4 Hangers shall not be placed on the coupling. 5 Vertical water lines shall be permitted to be supported in accordance with recognized engineering principles with regard to expansion and contraction, where first approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

6 See the appropriate IAPMO Installation Standard for expansion and other special requirements. G. MULTIPLE OR TRAPEZE HANGERS

1. Trapeze hangers shall be constructed from 12 gauge roll formed steel channel,

1-5/8” x 1-5/8” minimum, Tolstrut a12 strut or stronger as required. 2. Mount pipes to strut channel trapeze with two piece pipe straps sized for outside

diameter of pipe, or universal pipe clamps as required. 3. For pipes subject to axial movement: strut mounted roller support. Use pipe

protection shield or saddles on insulated lines.

H. VERTICAL SUPPORTS: steel riser clamp sized to fit outside diameter of pipe, TOLCO fig. 6.

PW1320-A




I. UPPER ATTACHMENTS

1. BEAM CLAMPS

A. Beam clamps shall be used where piping is to be suspended from building steel. Clamp type shall be selected on the basis of load to be supported, and load configuration.

B. C-clamps shall have locknuts and cup point set screws, TOLCO fig. 64.

Reversible top or bottom flange c-clamps shall be used when attaching a hanger rod to the top of flange of structural shapes, TOLCO fig. 65 and fig. 66. Retaining straps shall be used to maintain the clamps position on the beam where required.

C. Center loaded beam clamps shall be used where specified. Steel clamps

shall be TOLCO fig. 62. Malleable iron or forged steel beam clamps with cross bolt shall be TOLCO fig. 329.

2. CONCRETE INSERTS

A. Cast in place spot concrete inserts shall be used where applicable, either steel or malleable iron body, Blue Banger. Spot inserts shall allow for lateral adjustment and have means for attachment to forms. Select inserts to suit threaded hanger rod sizes, TOLCO fig. 310n or fig. 309n.

B. Continuous concrete inserts shall be used where applicable. Channels

shall be 12 gauge steel, complete with styrofoam inserts and end caps with nail holes for attachment to forms. The continuous concrete insert shall have a load rating of 2,000 lbs./ft. In concrete, Tolstrut fig. B-12 conct.

J. ACCESSORIES

1. Hanger rods shall be threaded both ends, or continuous threaded rods of circular

cross section TOLCO fig. 100 or fig. 103. Use adjusting locknuts at upper attachments and hangers. No wire, chain, or perforated straps are allowed.

2. Shields shall be 180° galvanized sheet metal, 12 inch minimum length, 18 gauge

minimum thickness, designed to match outside diameter of the insulated pipe, TOLCO fig. 220.

K. Wood Connectors: Angle clips with through bolts in shear; no lag screws in tension. 2.05 PIPE PROTECTION: A. Polyethylene Coating: Extruded polyethylene coating, X-Tru-Coat, or field wrap as in B,

PW1320-A




Raychem "Thermofit" polyethylene sleeve joints, or field wrap as in B. B. Tape Wrap: Pressure sensitive polyvinyl chloride tape, "Trantex #V-10 or V-20",

"Scotchrap #50", Slipknot 100, or equal, with continuous identification. Tape shall be a minimum of 20 mils thick for fittings and irregular surfaces, 2 wraps, 50% overlap, 40 mils total thickness. Tape shall be laminated with a suitable adhesive. Widths as recommended by the manufacturer for the pipe size. Wrap 50'-0" or longer sections of piping with an approved wrapping machine.

C. Pabco Wrap: Pabco Specifications #D-40-240K double wrap, in accordance with

manufacturer's recommendations or PVC as in B. Lap pipe wrap a minimum of 1/4" and stagger the second layer. All Pabco pipe wrapping shall be done by the manufacturer's agent and not by the Contractor, except the field joints.

D. Field Joints and Fittings: Pabco double wrap and Polyvinyl Chloride type as above.

Provide at least 2 thicknesses of tape over the joint and extend a minimum of 4" over adjacent pipe covering. Build up with primer to match adjacent covering thickness. Width of tape on fittings shall not exceed 2". Tape shall adhere tightly to all surfaces of the fittings, without air pockets.

2.06 ACCESS DOORS: Milcor, Newman, or equal, with concealed hinges, screwdriver locks, prime coated with

rust inhibitive paint, and style of door to suit ceiling or wall construction. Access doors in acoustical tile ceilings shall be "Sesame" with tile recess. Doors shall be 14 gage C.R. steel and shall be 22" x 30", 24" x 24" in tile ceiling, unless otherwise noted or required, fire rated to match rating of surface in which installed. Doors in walls of toilet rooms, shall be stainless steel.

2.07 THERMOMETERS: A. Weston, Ashcroft, Rochester, or equal, 5" diameter bimetal dial, adjustable from face,

located to be easily read from normal personnel approach. Normal reading shall be at mid-scale.

B. Provide extension for insulation. C. Provide thermometers with steel bulb chambers and brass separable sockets. D. Thermometers for air temperature shall have minimum 8" stem. 2.08 GAGES: A. March "Quality Gage", U.S. Gage, Ashcroft, or equal, with bronze bushed movement

and front recalibration. Dials shall be white with black numerals, 3-1/2" dial face. Normal reading shall be at mid-scale. Provide a gage cock on each gage connection.

PW1320-A




B. Supply gages on inlet and outlet of each pump and where shown on the drawings. C. Supply a Pete's Plug test plug or equal where shown on the drawings, nordel core. 2.09 STRAINERS: Charles M. Bailey #100A, Armstrong, Muessco Fig. 11, or equal, "Y" pattern, 125 psi

W.P. minimum, with monel screens with 20 square mesh for 2" and smaller and 3/64" perforations for 2-1/2" and larger. Install all strainers with a blow off hose valve with hose adaptor. Strainer shall have gasketed cover with straight thread.

2.10 INSULATION: A. Refer to Part 3. 2.12 FLASHING: All flashings shall be made for use with single ply roofing, Stoneman or equal, and

counter flashing. 2.13 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS: A. Furnish and install Thermo Tech., Inc., F/J/R, or equal, flexible couplings with limiter

bolts on piping connections to all equipment mounted on anti-vibration bases, except fan and coil units, on each connection to each base-mounted pump and where shown. Couplings shall be suitable for pressure and type of service.

B. Flexible connections in refrigerant lines: Flexonic, Anaconda, or equal, metal hose, full

size. Anchor piping securely on the system side of each flexible connection.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS: A. Provide adequate working space around electrical equipment in compliance with the

California Electric Code. Coordinate Mechanical Work with Electrical Work to comply. B. Furnish and set in place all motors. Furnish necessary control diagrams and instructions

for controls. Before permitting operation of any equipment which is furnished, installed or modified under this section, review all associated electrical work including overload protection devices and assume complete responsibility for correctness of electrical connections and protective devices.

C. Motors and control equipment shall conform to Standards of National Electrical

Manufacturer's Association. All equipment and connections exposed to the weather

PW1320-A




shall be NEMA IIIR with factory wired strip heaters in each starter enclosure, and temperature control panel to inhibit condensation.

D. All power wiring, conduit, fuses, thermal overloads, and disconnect switches, and

connection of all motors are under electrical work, Division 16. All wiring and conduit associated with the temperature control and indicating system is included in this section. Run all wiring in conduit in accordance with Division 16.

E. Electric Motors: All motors shall be rated for continuous operation at 115% of nameplate

amperage throughout the entire operating cycle. Motors found exceeding the nameplate amperage shall be promptly replaced at not cost to the Owner. Horsepowers shown are minimum and shall be increased as necessary to comply with above requirements.

F. Motor Starters: Furnish magnetic motor starter for all equipment furnished under this

section except those shown in motor control centers. G. Provide OSHA label indicating device starts automatically. F. Anchors: 1. Piping subject to expansion or contraction shall be provided with anchors and

expansion loops or joints as required. Provide adequate guides to prevent misalignment.

G. Fireproofing: 1. The annular space between the pipe sleeves and the pipe and between duct

openings and ducts through all floors and walls shall be protected by a UL-listed Fire Stopping System, 3M, Fire Barrier, Dow Firestop or Nelson Firestop.

3.06 SERVICE MARKERS: A. Mark the location of each plugged or capped pipe, set marker in 6" x 6" concrete pad

flush with finish grade. 3.07 PIPE JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS: A. Cutting: Cut piping and tubing square, ream cut ends to full bore, remove rough edges,

burrs, loose materials. B. Threaded Pipe: Make joints with Rectorseal #5 or Permatex #1 thread lubricant or joint

tape. Use no caulking of any kind. Remake leaky joints with new materials.

PW1320-A




C. Copper and Brass Pipe and Tubing (except Control Piping): Make all joints with silver brazing alloy, Sil-Fos or equal, for piping. Use leadless solder for potable water piping. All sizes above ground.

D. Clay Sewer Pipe: Joints in bell and spigot clay sewer pipe shall comply with ASTM C-

425, made with an approved type of interlocking, resilient mechanical compression joint, formed on the pipe at the factory or Calder or Band Seal couplings. Lubricate inside of bells and outside of spigots with a solution as recommended by the pipe manufacturer.

3.08 UNIONS AND FLANGES: A. Install Epco, or equal, dielectric unions or flanges at points of connection between

copper or brass piping material and steel or cast iron pipe or material except in drain, waste, vent, or rainwater piping. Bushings or couplings shall not be used. Dielectric unions shall not be installed below grade.

B. Install unions, whether shown or not, at each connection to all equipment and tanks, at

one connection to each valve or cock, and at all connections to all automatic valves, such as temperature control valves.

C. Locate the unions for easy removal of the equipment, tank or valve. 3.09 PIPE PROTECTION: A. Wrap all underground bare galvanized and black steel pipe and copper pipe, buried in

the ground and to 6" above grade, including piping in conduit, with a corrosive protective wrap as specified under “Pipe Protection” in Part 2 of Section 15010.

B. Cleaning: Clean all piping thoroughly before wrapping. C. Inspection: Damaged or defective wraps shall be repaired as directed. No wrapped

pipe shall be covered until approved by the Architect. D. Testing: Test completed piping with Tinker and Rasor Co. test machine (San Gabriel,

Calif. 626/287-7942). E. Covering: No rocks or sharp edges shall be backfilled against the wrap. when

backfilling with other than sand, protect wrap with an outer wrapping of Kraft paper. Leave in place during backfill.

3.10 INSULATION WORK: A. General:

PW1320-A




1. All insulation shall be done by a contractor specifically licensed for insulation work. Insulation applied by the mechanical and plumbing contractor is not acceptable.

2. The term "piping" used herein shall include pipe, air separators, valves, strainers

and fittings. Apply insulating cement to fittings, valves and strainers and trowel smooth to the thickness of adjacent covering. Cover with jacket to match piping. Extend covering on valves up to the bonnet. Leave strainer cleanout plugs accessible. Valve and fitting covers may be preformed PVC. Provide rigid insulation, 18" minimum length at each pipe hanger. Seal ends of insulation with jacket.

3. Do not insulate flanges and unions on high temperature piping. Insulate unions

and pump bodies on chilled water and combination hot and chilled water systems with three heavy layers of Mortell's No-Drip Paint, 1/16" minimum total thickness or Armstrong Armaflex Tape per manufacturer's recommendations.

4. Clean thoroughly, test, and have approved, all piping and equipment before

installing covering. 5. All insulation, adhesive coverings and jackets including pre-insulated flexible

ductwork shall have a flame spread of 25 or less and developed smoke rating of 50 or less tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

6. (For Remodel Jobs) Repair all damage to existing pipe and duct insulation whether or not it was

caused during the work of this contract, to match existing adjacent insulation for thickness and finish but conforming to flame spread and smoke ratings specified above.

B. Insulation of Piping: 1. Insulate all heating and domestic hot and tempered water supply and return,

including pumped return piping with 3-1/2# per cubic foot minimum density fiberglass with ASJ-SSL jacket, or equal; 1" thick for pipes 1" and smaller; 1-1/2" thick for pipes 1-1/4" and over. Domestic hot and tempered water shall be insulated same as shown above.

2. Insulate domestic cold water piping outside of insulation envelope in outside

walls, vented attics, and unheated spaces, including equipment rooms with 1/2" thick molded fiberglass, minimum density 3-1/2# per cubic foot, with ASJ-SSL jacket or 3/8" Armstrong Armaflex, or equal. Install per manufacturer's instructions. Insulate domestic cold water piping exposed to the weather with 3/8" thick Armstrong Armaflex with two coats of Armaflex finish, install Armaflex per manufacturer's instructions. Fitting covers shall be fabricated from miter-cut

PW1320-A




tubular form or from Armaflex sheet. In all cases, butt joints and seams shall be sealed with Armstrong 520 adhesive.

3. Insulate all refrigerant suction piping, chilled water supply and return piping and

all combination hot and chilled water piping with 1" thick, 3-1/2# per cubic foot minimum density fiberglass with factory-applied ASJ-SSL jacket, or equal, 1-1/2" thick for chilled water pipes 6" and over and refrigerant piping 1-1/4" and larger. Insulate valves and irregular surfaces to match adjacent insulation and cover with two layers of Glasfab saturated in Foster's 30-36, 3M, or equal, carried 3" over the adjoining pipe insulation. Finish with a coat of Foster's 30-36, 3M, or equal. The 3" wide SSL end laps furnished with the insulation shall be adhered over the end joints. Seal entire surface of insulation vaportight, including joints and ends of plastic fitting covers.

4. Urethane insulation will not be allowed above ground or on hot water or steam

piping. 5. On all insulated piping exposed to the weather apply .015 aluminum jacket

secured with 1/2" aluminum bands on 12" centers. Cover fittings with Prefabricated aluminum jacket fittings or custom fabricated fittings designed to provide water shedding. Insulation shall be vaportight before applying metal jacket. Seal and caulk all joints and screw penetrations that have a potential for moisture intrusion.

Refrigerant line sets line sets exposed to the weather shall be covered with

Venture Tape 1507, 3 mil, UV protectant. 6. All insulated piping exposed in occupied spaces or mechanical rooms shall have

a Proto or equal, 25/50 rated PVC jacket. Color as selected, installed and sealed per manufacturer's recommendations.

7. In lieu of the above, refrigerant piping, including all fittings, may be at the option

of the Contractor, insulated with nominal 3/4" thick Armstrong Armaflex 22, Owens-Corning Flex Tubing, or equal. Seal all joints with Armstrong 520 adhesive, Owens-Corning 500 adhesive, or equal. Insulation exposed to the weather shall be finished with two coats of Armstrong white Armaflex finish, or equal. Apply insulation in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

8. All insulated piping buried below grade or slabs on ground shall be insulated with

1" thick urethane and applied as follows: Coat all joined surfaces with Foster's No. 60-26, MMM, or equal. Secure with 1/2" fiberglass reinforced tape on 12" centers. Spiral wrap two separate layers of Glasfab lapped 1" minimum and embedded in Foster's 60-26 mastic between layers. A third layer of 60-26 shall be applied. Heating or steam main piping at elbows and the branch connections to main shall be first wrapped with 1" fiberglass and then insulated and wrapped as above. The length of the flexible insulation shall be adequate to allow for

PW1320-A




expansion of the pipe and in no case less than 5'-0" in each direction. Field joints shall be installed as above. Pipe covering shall have joints rotated 90°. Protect the covering until it has been inspected and covered.

9. Encase all insulated piping buried below grade or slabs on ground in Ric-Wil

prefabricated conduit, or equal. Insulation shall be 1" thick fiberglass, calcium silicate or urethane, or equal. Conduit shop drawings shall be approved prior to start of insulation. Install expansion loop fittings and anchors where required to control and accommodate pipe movement from thermal expansion. After piping has been tested and approved, conduit field joints shall be made by the conduit manufacturer; vent casing as required. Conduit shall be guaranteed in writing for five years. Conduit shall be a cataloged product of the manufacturer. Conduit shall have been field tested a minimum of two years.

C. Insulation of Equipment: 1. Cover hot water storage tank and hot water heat exchanger, condensate receiver

and all equipment containing steam or steam condensate with 1-1/2" thick fiberglass pipe insulation or rigid fiberglass insulation #704, or equal, securely wired on with 16 gauge copper-clad wire. Apply a 1" galvanized hexagonal mesh netting stretched tight and securely fastened to the insulation; over this apply one coat of mineral wool cement to a total minimum thickness of 1/4", troweled smooth, and finished with 8 ounce canvas jacket, tightly pasted on with lagging adhesive. The entire surface of the canvas jacket shall have a finish sizing consisting of one brush coat of dilute adhesive. Manholes and hand holes shall be made accessible by beveling off the insulation around the manhole. Boiler breeching shall be insulated same as above, except 2" thick calcium silicate block, or equal, with 3/4" deep minimum V-Rib wire lath securely wired in place before applying the calcium silicate.

2. Water chilling equipment which does not have factory-applied low temperature

insulation shall be covered with 3/4" OC flex sheeting, or equal, secured with OC- 500 adhesive; seal joints with OC-500 adhesive. Cover insulation exposed to the

weather with two coats of white OC finish. D. Duct Insulation: 1. Wrap all unlined concealed supply and return ducts with O.C. Fiberglas All-

Service duct wrap with a reinforced foil Kraft vapor barrier facing 1 1/2" thick and 3/4# per cubic foot density. Wrap insulation entirely around duct. Lap all insulation joints 3" minimum. Insulate ducts installed tight against other work before hanging in place.

2. All ducts and plenums in Fan Room shall be insulated with 1-1/2" (2" outside

building) thick Fiberglas 705 insulating board with factory-applied foil facing. Insulation shall be adhered to ducts with Type B STICKLIPS at 18" o.c.

PW1320-A




cemented in place. Metal cladding or equal. 3. Install acoustical lining in all supply, return and mixed air ducts and plenums

exposed in the Equipment Room or outside the building and where marked; and additional length as necessary to provide, in all cases, a minimum of 10'-0" in each direction from the fan, fan casing, or unit casing. Line exhaust ducts for a minimum of 10'-0" from fan inlet. Line all transfer ducts. Lining shall be 1" thick vinyl face black matt Fiberglas Aeroflex Type 150, 1-1/2# per cubic foot, J-M, or equal. Cement the lining in place with 100% coverage of Foster's 85-20, 3M #38, or equal, and coat all edges and joints. In addition, all lining shall be fastened with Sticklips or welded pins spaced at 18" maximum centers both ways. No bare fiberglass shall be left exposed to air stream.

4. Seal airtight seams of all ductwork. Sealant shall be UL 181 listed. Seal

insulated ducts before insulating

5. Seal airtight all joints and seams with Design Polymerics 1020 water based duct indoor/outdoor sealant (UL 181 B-M listed). Sealing shall including but not be limited to fitting joints, TDC/TDF flange corners, sheet metal screw heads, all seams not sealed with sealant, flexible duct connections, round collars. Apply sealant liberally by brush, trowel, pump, or caulk to achieve a maximum leakage in accordance with SMACNA. For fittings and couplings: apply sealant to male sections of fitting, apply sheet metal screws per SMACNA requirements, and apply a 2 inch band of sealant around outside of Joint covering all screws. For flexible duct, provide nylon drawband over connection to collar in accordance with other sections of this specification.

3.14 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION: A. Identify each piece of equipment with an engraved laminated plastic. For example -

EXHAUST FAN 2. 3.15 PIPE IDENTIFICATION: A. Identify each piping system and indicate the direction of flow by means of Idento Bands

(Idento Metal Products Co.) or SETMARK pipe markers. Apply the markings after all painting and cleaning of the piping and insulation is completed.

B. Apply the legend and flow arrow at all valve locations; at all points where the piping

enters or leaves a wall, partition, cluster of piping or similar obstruction; and at approximately 50'-0" intervals on pipe runs. Variations or changes in locations and spacing may be made with the approval of the Architect. There shall be at least one marking in each room. Markings shall be located for maximum visibility from expected personnel approach.

C. Wherever two or more pipes run parallel, the markings shall be supplied in the same

relative location on each.

PW1320-A




D. The legends and flow arrows shall conform to ANSI A13.1. E. The sizes of the letter and flow arrows shall be as follows: Outside Diameter of Pipe Minimum Length or Covering (Inclusive) Size of Letter of Flow Arrow 5/8" to 2" 1/2" 2-1/2" 2-1/2" and Larger 1" 4" F. Each hand valve on non-potable water piping shall be labeled with a metal tag stamped

"DANGER -- NON-POTABLE WATER" in one-quarter inch (1/4") high letters. 3.16 GUARDS: A. General: Belt drive, gear drive shafts, couplings, fan inlets and outlets, and running

equipment shall be properly protected by guards as required by the CCR, Title 8, Division of Industrial Safety, Sub Chapter 7, General Industry Safety Orders, Articles 31 through 36, whether shown on the drawings or not.

B. Construction: Guards shall be factory furnished or made of expanded metal with angle

iron framework. Guards for belt drives shall have an easily removable section for replacement of belts. Openings shall be provided at shaft ends for taking rpm readings.

3.17 ANTI-VIBRATION BASES AND HANGERS: A. All ventilating and air conditioning equipment shall operate under continuous demand

without objectionable vibration. Contractor shall be sure that above result is achieved. Isolate all equipment connections, including conduit, piping, drains, etc.

B. Air conditioning units and all fans shall be supported on anti-vibration bases or hangers.

Other equipment and pumps shall be supported on anti-vibration bases, pads or hangers, when shown on Drawings or specified with equipment. Isolators and supporting bases shall be supplied by single manufacturer, Kinetics, Korfund, or equal. Type of mounting and supporting base for each piece of equipment shall be as tabulated on equipment schedule or as hereinafter specified. Individual mounts shall be Kinetics Type FPS, or equal. Contractor shall provide calculations for isolators and mounting acceptable to reviewing authority.

C. Isolator manufacturer's submittal shall include complete design for supplementary bases,

tabulation of design data on isolators, including O.D. free operating, and solid heights of springs, free and operating heights of neoprene or fiberglass isolators, and isolation efficiency based on lowest operating speed of equipment supported.

3.18 SPECIAL SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS:

PW1320-A




A. Supports for all piping and ductwork shall be in accordance with Office of Statewide

Health Planning and Development approved anchorage No. R-0010. Contractor shall provide calculations for isolators and mounting acceptable to the reviewing authority.

3.19 TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS: A. Test the installation in accordance with the following requirements and all applicable

codes. Notify the Architect at least 7 days in advance of any test. All piping shall be tested at completion of roughing-in, or at other times as directed by the Architect.

B. Furnish all necessary materials, test pumps, gases, instruments and labor required for

testing. Tests shall be witnessed by the Architect. C. Isolate from the system all equipment which may be damaged by test pressure. D. Test Schedule: No loss in pressure or visible leaks shall show after four hours at the

pressures indicated. System Tested Test Pressure PSI Test With Sanitary Sewer, Drain, Vent 10 Ft. Hd. Water Storm Drain, Condensate Drains 10 Ft. Hd. Water Domestic Hot and Cold Water 125 Water Dry Standpipes 300 Water Wet Standpipes 150 Water Gases and Vacuum 100 Air & Soap Compressed Air, Except Controls 200 Air & Soap PVC Irrigation Piping 100 Water All Hot, Chilled, Combination, Condenser Water Piping 125 Water Up to 15 psi Steam Piping and All Steam Condensate Piping 150 Water Steam Piping above 15 psi 300 Water Fuel Oil 1-1/2 x WP & 20" Distilled Deionized Water 50 Water All steam piping shall be tested with normal pressure steam before insulating. Flush distilled deionized water lines with distilled deionized water after test and approval. All piping, including underground, connected to the fire sprinkler system shall be tested

and certified in accordance with ISO requirements. E. Testing, Evacuating, Charging and Lubrication of Refrigeration Systems:

PW1320-A




1. Pressurize with dry nitrogen and/or refrigerant to 300 psig and test all joints with an electronic detector or halide torch. Release the pressure and attach a high vacuum pump. Evacuate to 4mm (4000 microns) and hold for 30 minutes. Break to 5 psig with dry nitrogen or R-22 and allow to remain in the system for

ten minutes. Evacuate to 2mm (2000 microns) and hold for 30 minutes. Use a mercury manometer or electronic vacuum gauge. Do not start timing until recommended vacuum range is reached.

2. At the end of the evacuation, if the system has been proved leakfree, charge with

refrigerant and fill the crankcase to the oil level specified by the manufacturer. All refrigerant oil shall be delivered to the location in sealed containers.

3. Replenish for a period of one year without cost to the Owner all refrigerant and oil

required to maintain the proper levels. F. Perform operational tests under simulated or actual service conditions, including one test

of complete plumbing installation with all fixtures and other appliances connected. G. Should any material or work fail in any of these tests, it shall be immediately removed

and replaced by new material, any portion of the work replaced shall again be tested by Contractor at his own expense.

H. Instruct Owner's operating personnel during test and operating adjustment period.

Lubricate each item of equipment, including motors, before operation. 3.20 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMES AND COVERS: A. Furnish all steel channel frames and covers in connection with concrete work required

by this Section of the Specification. All items shall be welded construction, and except as noted, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication painted two coats of chromate before delivering to the jobsite.

END OF SECTION

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ELECTRICALPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 260505

PAGE 1 of 5

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ELECTRICAL 260505 - 1

SECTION 260505 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Removal of existing electrical equipment, wiring, and conduit in areas to be remodeled; removal of designated construction; dismantling, cutting and alterations for completion of the Work.

2. Disposal of materials.3. Storage of removed materials.4. Identification of utilities.5. Salvaged items.6. Protection of items to remain. 7. Relocate existing equipment to accommodate construction.

1.2 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule work to coincide with new construction.

B. Cease operations immediately when structure appears to be in danger and notify Architect/Engineer. Do not resume operations until directed.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied building areas.

B. Coordinate demolition work with owner.

C. Coordinate and sequence demolition so as not to cause shutdown of operation of surrounding areas.

D. Shut-down Periods:

1. Arrange timing of shut-down periods of in service panels with Owner. Do not shut down any utility without prior written approval.

2. Keep shut-down period to minimum or use intermittent period as directed by owner.

E. Identify salvage items in cooperation with Owner.

PW1320-A




PAGE 2 of 5


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify wiring and equipment indicated to be demolished serve only abandoned facilities.

C. Verify termination points for demolished services.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Erect, and maintain temporary safeguards, including warning signs and lights, barricades, and similar measures, for protection of the public, Owner, Contractor's employees, and existing improvements to remain.

B. Temporary egress signage and emergency lighting.

C. Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.

D. Existing Telephone System: Maintain existing system in service.

E. Existing Public Address System: Maintain existing system in service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.

3.3 DEMOLITION

A. Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents. Report discrepancies to Owner and Architect/Engineer before disturbing existing installation.

B. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, cabling and associated supports, including abandoned conduit and cables above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces to match existing.

PW1320-A




PAGE 3 of 5


C. Remove conduit, wire, boxes, and fastening devices to avoid any interference with new installation.

D. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal.

E. Remaining Circuits and Equipment: Reinstall existing electrical installations disturbed. Certain existing electrical installations may be located in walls, ceilings or floors that are to be removed and are essential for the operation of other remaining installations. Where this condition occurs provide a new extension of original circuits, raceways, equipment and outlets to retain service continuity. Installations shall be concealed in finished areas.

F. Reconnect equipment being disturbed by renovation work and required for continue service to nearest available panel.

G. Disconnect or shut off service to areas where electrical work is to be removed. Remove electrical fixtures, equipment, and related switches, outlets, conduit and wiring which are not part of final project.

H. Install temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction.

I. Perform work on energized equipment or circuits with experienced and trained personnel.

J. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.

K. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work.

L. Remove exposed abandoned grounding and bonding components, fasteners and supports, and electrical identification components, including abandoned components above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut embedded support elements flush with walls and floors.

M. Clean and repair existing equipment to remain or to be reinstalled.

N. Protect and retain power to existing active equipment remaining.

O. Cap abandoned empty conduit at both ends.

3.4 EXISTING PANELBOARDS

A. Ring out circuits in existing panel affected by the Work. Where additional circuits are needed, reuse circuits available for reuse. Install new breakers.

B. Tag unused circuits as spare.

PW1320-A




PAGE 4 of 5


C. Where existing circuits are indicated to be reused, use sensing measuring devices to verify circuits feeding Project area or are not in use.

D. Remove existing wire no longer in use from panel to equipment.

E. Provide new updated directories where circuits have been modified or rewired.

3.5 SALVAGE ITEMS

A. Remove and protect items indicated on Drawings to be salvaged and turn over to Owner.

B. Items of salvageable value may be removed as work progresses. Transport salvaged items from site as they are removed.

3.6 REUSABLE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

A. Carefully remove equipment, materials, or fixtures which are to be reused.

B. Disconnect, remove, or relocate existing electrical material and equipment interfering with new installation.

C. Relocate existing lighting fixtures as indicated on Drawings. Clean fixtures and re-lamp. Test fixture to see if it is in good working condition before installation at new location.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Remove demolished materials as work progresses. Legally dispose.

B. Keep workplace neat.

C. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused.

D. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement.

E. Luminaries: Use mild detergent to clean all exterior and interior surfaces; rinse with clean water and wipe dry. Replace lamps, ballasts, and broken electrical parts.

PW1320-A




PAGE 5 of 5


3.8 RECYCLABLE AND REUSABLE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

A. Contractor shall be responsible for recycling of all removed materials and equipment as part of this work. Materials shall be collected by a recognized and approved reuse and recycling center.

B. Recyclable and reusable material and equipment shall include but not limited to the following: 1. Plastic lighting diffusers 2. Ferrous metals 3. Non-ferrous metals 4. Fluorescent lamps and ballasts

3.9 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor surface.

END OF SECTION 260505

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMSPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 26 05 29

PAGE 1 of 9

SECTION 26 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Conduit supports.2. Formed steel channel.3. Spring steel clips.4. Sleeves.5. Mechanical sleeve seals.6. Firestopping relating to electrical work.7. Firestopping accessories.8. Equipment bases and supports.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International:

1. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

2. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.

3. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.

4. ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems.

B. National Fire Protection Association:

1. [Part 3, Title 24, - California Electrical Code (CEC).][NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code].

C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:

1. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.2. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.3. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.4. UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems.5. UL - Fire Resistance Directory.

D. Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed):

PW1320-A




PAGE 2 of 9

1. WH - Certification Listings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Firestopping (Through-Penetration Protection System): Sealing or stuffing material or assembly placed in spaces between and penetrations through building materials to arrest movement of fire, smoke, heat, and hot gases through fire rated construction.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Firestopping Materials: ASTM E119, ASTM E814, UL 263, UL 1479 to achieve fire ratings as noted on Drawings for adjacent construction, but not less than 1 hour fire rating.

B. Firestop interruptions to fire rated assemblies, materials, and components.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Firestopping: Conform to applicable UL for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics.

B. Firestopping: Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of materials used.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load capacity.

2. Firestopping: Submit data on product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria.

B. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of hangers and supports.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions:

1. Hangers and Supports: Submit special procedures and assembly of components.2. Firestopping: Submit preparation and installation instructions.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

E. Firestopping Engineering Judgments: For conditions not covered by UL or WH listed designs, submit judgments by licensed professional engineer suitable for presentation

PW1320-A




PAGE 3 of 9

to authority having jurisdiction for acceptance as meeting code fire protection requirements.


A. Through Penetration Firestopping of Fire Rated Assemblies: UL 1479 or ASTM E814 with 0.10 inch water gage minimum positive pressure differential to achieve fire F-Ratings and temperature T-Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1-hour.

1. Wall Penetrations: Fire F-Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1-hour.

2. Floor and Roof Penetrations: Fire F-Ratings and temperature T-Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1-hour.

a. Floor Penetrations Within Wall Cavities: T-Rating is not required.

B. Through Penetration Firestopping of Non-Fire Rated Floor and Roof Assemblies: Materials to resist free passage of flame and products of combustion.

1. Noncombustible Penetrating Items: Noncombustible materials for penetrating items connecting maximum of three stories.

2. Penetrating Items: Materials approved by authorities having jurisdiction for penetrating items connecting maximum of two stories.

C. Fire Resistant Joints in Fire Rated Floor, Roof, and Wall Assemblies: ASTM E1966 or UL 2079 to achieve fire resistant rating as indicated on Drawings for assembly in which joint is installed.

D. Fire Resistant Joints Between Floor Slabs and Exterior Walls: ASTM E119 with 0.10 inch water gage minimum positive pressure differential to achieve fire resistant rating as indicated on Drawings for floor assembly.

E. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum 25/450 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

1.8 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years’ experience.


A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification.

PW1320-A




PAGE 4 of 9

B. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original packaging.

1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not apply firestopping materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60 degrees F.

B. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for minimum 3 days after installation of firestopping materials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUIT SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods: Threaded high tensile strength galvanized carbon steel with free running threads.

B. Beam Clamps: Malleable Iron, with tapered hole in base and back to accept either bolt or hanger rod. Set screw: hardened steel.

C. Conduit clamps - general purpose: One hole malleable iron for surface mounted conduits.

D. Cable Ties: High strength nylon temperature rated to 185 degrees F. Self-locking.

2.2 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL

A. Product Description: Galvanized 12 gage thick steel. With holes 1-1/2 inches on center.

2.3 SPRING STEEL CLIPS

A. Product Description: Mounting hole and screw closure.

2.4 SLEEVES

A. Sleeves for Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel.

B. Sleeves for Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage thick galvanized steel.

C. Sleeves for Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fire Proofing: Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed.

PW1320-A




PAGE 5 of 9

D. Fire-stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible.

2.5 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Product Description: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between object and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates causing rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation.

2.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Product Description: Different types of products by multiple manufacturers are acceptable as required to meet specified system description and performance requirements; provide only one type for each similar application.

1. Silicone Firestopping Elastomeric Firestopping: Single component silicone elastomeric compound and compatible silicone sealant.

2. Foam Firestopping Compounds: Single component foam compound.3. Formulated Firestopping Compound of Incombustible Fibers: Formulated

compound mixed with incombustible non-asbestos fibers.4. Fiber Stuffing and Sealant Firestopping: Composite of mineral fiber stuffing

insulation with silicone elastomer for smoke stopping.5. Mechanical Firestopping Device with Fillers: Mechanical device with

incombustible fillers and silicone elastomer, covered with sheet stainless steel jacket, joined with collars, penetration sealed with flanged stops.

6. Intumescent Firestopping: Intumescent putty compound which expands on exposure to surface heat gain.

7. Firestop Pillows: Formed mineral fiber pillows.

2.7 FIRESTOPPING ACCESSORIES

A. Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces and suitable for required fire ratings.

B. Dam Material: Permanent:

1. Mineral fiberboard.2. Mineral fiber matting.3. Sheet metal.4. Plywood or particle board.5. Alumina silicate fire board.

PW1320-A




PAGE 6 of 9

C. Installation Accessories: Provide clips, collars, fasteners, temporary stops or dams, and other devices required to position and retain materials in place.

D. General:

1. Furnish UL listed products or products tested by independent testing laboratory.2. Select products with rating not less than rating of wall or floor being penetrated.

E. Non-Rated Surfaces:

1. Stamped steel, chrome plated, hinged, split ring escutcheons or floor plates or ceiling plates for covering openings in occupied areas where conduit is exposed.

2. For exterior wall openings below grade, furnish modular mechanical type seal consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between conduit and cored opening or water-stop type wall sleeve.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves.

B. Verify openings are ready to receive firestopping.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter affecting bond of firestopping material.

B. Remove incompatible materials affecting bond.

C. Install damming materials to arrest liquid material leakage.

D. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before using powder-actuated anchors.

E. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members.

3.3 INSTALLATION - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Anchors and Fasteners:

1. Concrete Structural Elements: Provide expansion anchors and powder actuated anchors.

2. Steel Structural Elements: Provide beam clamps, spring steel clips.

PW1320-A




PAGE 7 of 9

3. Concrete Surfaces: Provide expansion anchors.4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Provide toggle bolts.5. Solid Masonry Walls: Provide expansion anchors.6. Sheet Metal: Provide sheet metal screws.7. Wood Elements: Provide wood screws.

B. Install conduit and raceway support and spacing in accordance with CEC.

C. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit.

D. Install multiple conduit runs on common hangers.

E. Supports:

1. Fabricate supports from structural steel or formed steel channel. Install hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Install spring lock washers under nuts.

2. Install surface mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.3. In wet and damp locations install steel channel supports to stand cabinets and

panelboards 1 inch off wall.4. Support vertical conduit at every floor.

3.4 INSTALLATION - FIRESTOPPING

A. Install material at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves, piping, ductwork, conduit and other items, requiring firestopping.

B. Apply primer where recommended by manufacturer for type of firestopping material and substrate involved, and as required for compliance with required fire ratings.

C. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve required fire and smoke rating.

D. Place intumescent coating in sufficient coats to achieve rating required.

E. Remove dam material after firestopping material has cured.] [Dam material to remain.

F. Fire Rated Surface:

1. Seal opening at wall and partition as follows:

a. Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 1 inch on both sides of building element.

b. Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch void between sleeve and building element.

c. Pack void with backing material.

PW1320-A




PAGE 8 of 9

d. Seal ends of sleeve with UL listed fire resistive silicone compound to meet fire rating of structure penetrated.

2. Where conduit penetrates fire rated surface, install firestopping product in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

G. Non-Rated Surfaces:

1. Seal opening through non-fire rated wall, ceiling, and roof opening as follows:

a. Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 1 inch on both sides of building element.

b. Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch void between sleeve and building element.

c. Install type of firestopping material recommended by manufacturer.

2. Install floor plates or ceiling plates where conduit, penetrates non-fire rated surfaces in occupied spaces. Occupied spaces include rooms with finished ceilings and where penetration occurs below finished ceiling.

3.5 INSTALLATION - SLEEVES

A. Exterior watertight entries: Seal with adjustable interlocking rubber links.

B. Conduit penetrations not required to be watertight: Sleeve and fill with silicon foam.

C. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.

D. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.

E. Extend sleeves through floors 3 inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves.

F. Where conduit or raceway penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between conduit or raceway and adjacent work with fire stopping insulation and caulk airtight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration.

G. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.


A. Inspect installed firestopping for compliance with specifications and submitted schedule.

PW1320-A




PAGE 9 of 9

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.

3.8 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.

END OF SECTION

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMSPUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 26 05 33

PAGE 1 of 8

SECTION 260533 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes conduit outlet boxes, pull and junction boxes.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute:

1. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated.2. ANSI C80.3 - Specification for Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated.

B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:

1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).2. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and

Cable Assemblies.3. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box

Supports.4. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box

Supports.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Raceway and boxes located as indicated on Drawings, and at other locations required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and compliance with regulatory requirements. Raceway and boxes are shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Provide raceway to complete wiring system.

B. Underground More than 5 feet outside Foundation Wall: Provide rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, plastic coated conduit, thickwall nonmetallic conduit and thin-wall nonmetallic conduit. Provide cast metal boxes or nonmetallic handhole.

C. Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Provide rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit. Provide cast metal or nonmetallic outlet, pull, and junction boxes.

D. In Slab Above Grade: Provide rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, thickwall nonmetallic conduit]. Provide [cast] [sheet metal] [nonmetallic] boxes.

PW1320-A




PAGE 2 of 8

E. Wet and Damp Locations: Provide rigid steel conduit. Provide cast metal or nonmetallic outlet, junction, and pull boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas.

F. Concealed Dry Locations: Provide electrical metallic tubing. Provide sheet-metal boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pull boxes.

G. Exposed Dry Locations: Provide electrical metallic tubing. Provide sheet-metal boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pull boxes.

1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4 inch unless otherwise specified.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit for the following:

1. Flexible metal conduit.2. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.3. Conduit bodies.4. Pull and junction boxes.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.


A. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate mounting heights, orientation and locations of outlets.

PW1320-A




PAGE 3 of 8

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUIT

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

B. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: ANSI C80.5.

C. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel.

D. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit.

2.2 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

A. Product Description: Interlocked steel construction.

B. Fittings: NEMA FB 1.

2.3 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

A. Product Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket.

B. Fittings: NEMA FB 1.

2.4 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)

A. Product Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.

B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel, compression or set screw couplings and connectors. Box connectors shall have with insulated throat .

2.5 OUTLET BOXES

A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.

1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; furnish 1/2 inch male fixture studs where required.

2. Boxes shall be 1-1/2 inch deep by 4 inch square minimum.

B. Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 2.

C. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cast feralloy. Furnish gasketed cover by box manufacturer. Furnish threaded hubs.

PW1320-A




PAGE 4 of 8

D. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Wiring Devices.

E. Wall Plates for Unfinished Areas: Furnish gasketed cover.

2.6 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.

B. Hinged Enclosures: As specified in Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures.

C. Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type [4] [6]; flat-flanged, surface mounted junction box:

1. Material: Galvanized cast iron.2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover

screws.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify outlet locations and routing and termination locations of raceway prior to rough-in.

3.2 EXISTING WORK

A. Remove exposed abandoned raceway, including abandoned raceway above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut raceway flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.

B. Remove concealed abandoned raceway to its source.

C. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets when raceway is abandoned and removed. Install blank cover for abandoned outlets not removed.

D. Maintain access to existing boxes and other installations remaining active and requiring access. Modify installation or provide access panel.

E. Extend existing raceway and box installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations.

F. Clean and repair existing raceway and boxes to remain or to be reinstalled.

PW1320-A




PAGE 5 of 8

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Fasten raceway and box supports to structure and finishes in accordance with Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

B. Identify raceway and boxes in accordance with Identification for Electrical Systems.

C. Arrange raceway and boxes to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.

3.4 INSTALLATION - RACEWAY

A. Raceway routing is shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route to complete wiring system.

B. Arrange raceway supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.

C. Support raceway using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers.

D. Group related raceway; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel specified in Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems; provide space on each for 25 percent additional raceways.

E. Do not support raceway with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports

F. Do not attach raceway to ceiling support wires or other piping systems.

G. Construct wireway supports from steel channel specified in Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

H. Route exposed raceway parallel and perpendicular to walls.

I. Route raceway installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.

J. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point.

K. Maximum Size Conduit in Slab Above Grade: 3/4 inch. Do not cross conduits in slab larger than 1/2 inch.

L. Maintain clearance between raceway and piping for maintenance purposes.

M. Maintain 12 inch clearance between raceway and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F.

N. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends.

PW1320-A




PAGE 6 of 8

O. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.

P. Install conduit hubs to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet locations and to cast boxes.

Q. Install no more than equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes. Install conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Avoid moisture traps; install junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system.

R. Install fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where raceway crosses expansion joints.

S. Install suitable pull string or cord in each empty raceway except sleeves and nipples.

T. Install suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.

U. Surface Raceway: Install flat-head screws, clips, and straps to fasten raceway channel to surfaces; mount plumb and level. Install insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner fittings.

V. Close ends and unused openings in wireway.

3.5 INSTALLATION - BOXES

A. Adjust box location up to 10 feet prior to rough-in to accommodate intended purpose.

B. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Wiring Devices.

C. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only.

D. In Accessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire.

E. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.

F. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; install with minimum 6 inches separation. Install with minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls.

G. Provide fire rated moldable putty pads for all boxes located in fire rated walls.

H. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness.

I. Install stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.

PW1320-A




PAGE 7 of 8

J. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.

K. Install adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.

L. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires or other piping systems.

M. Support boxes independently of conduit.

N. Install gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box.

O. Install gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.

P. Boxes located below eight feet in exposed interior dry locations shall be one piece drawn steel or cast type.

3.6 INSTALLATION CONCRETE COMPOSITE HANDHOLES

A. Install boxes flush with finished grade or surface material.

B. Provide hold down bolts for all covers.

C. Provide minimum 12” depth of crushed rock or pea gravel below boxes for drainage. Ground bond steel cover plate with insulated green grounding conductor

3.7 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements.

B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation.

C. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as indicated on Drawings.

D. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.

B. Install knockout closures in unused openings in boxes.

PW1320-A




PAGE 8 of 8

3.9 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material.

B. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish.

END OF SECTION

PW1320-A


MUNICIPAL SERVICE CENTER STOCKTON CORPORATE YARD

CITY OF STOCKTON IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 26 05 53 PAGE 1 of 4

SECTION 26 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Nameplates.

2. Labels.

3. Wire markers.

4. Conduit markers.

5. Lockout Devices.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Submit manufacturer's catalog literature for each product required.

2. Submit electrical identification schedule including list of wording, symbols, letter size, color coding, tag number, location, and function.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and installation.


A. Provide material supplied by a manufacturer producing identification systems.

B. Comply with OSHA, NFPA or local jurisdiction identification requirements for electrical systems.


A. Accept identification products on site in original containers. Inspect for damage.

B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness.

PW1320-A





C. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NAMEPLATES

A. Product Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters on contrasting background color.

B. Letter Size:

1. 1/4 inch high letters for identifying individual equipment and loads.

2. 1/2 inch high letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.

C. Minimum nameplate thickness: 1/8 inch.

2.2 LABELS

A. Labels: Thermal transfer laminated adhesive tape with 1/8 inch black letters on clear tape cartridge.

2.3 WIRE MARKERS

A. Description: Self-adhering, pre-printed, machine printable or write-on, self-laminating vinyl wrap around strips. Blank markers shall be inscribed using the printer or pen recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

B. Legend:

1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number as indicated on Drawings.

2. Control Circuits: Control wire number as indicated on shop drawings.

2.4 LOCKOUT DEVICES

A. Lockout Hasps:

1. Reinforced nylon hasp with erasable label surface; size minimum 7-1/4 x 3 inches.

PW1320-A





2.5 CONDUCTOR PHASE MARKERS

A. Colored vinyl plastic electrical tape, 3/4 inch wide, for identification of phase conductors.

2.6 CONDUIT AND RACEWAY MARKERS

A. Description: Labels fastened with adhesive.

B. Color:

1. 208 Volt System: Blue lettering on white background.

2.7 Legend:

1. 208 Volt System: 208 VOLTS.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install identifying devices after completion of painting.

B. Nameplate Installation:

1. Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines.

2. Install nameplate for each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.

3. Install nameplates for each control panel and major control components located outside panel with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.

4. Secure nameplate to equipment front using [screws] [, rivets] [, or] [adhesive].

5. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on recessed panelboard in finished locations.

6. Install nameplates for the following: a. Fused and Non-Fused Disconnects.

PW1320-A





C. Provide color coded nameplates that present, as applicable, the following information:

1. Equipment or device designation.

2. Amperage, kVA, or horsepower rating where applicable.

3. Voltage or signal system name.

4. Source or power or control.

5. Examples: a. Disconnects and Individual Motor Starters: AHU-1; 25HP; 480V, 3-Phase,

3-Wires; Served from EHD5.

D. Color coding for nameplates for power systems:

1. 120/208V Normal – Blue with white letters.

E. Label Installation:

1. Install label parallel to equipment lines.

2. Install label for identification of individual control device stations, receptacles, and switches.

3. Install labels for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.

F. Wire Marker Installation:

1. Install wire marker for each conductor at panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes, and each load connection.

2. Install labels at data outlets identifying patch panel and port designation as indicated on Drawings.

END OF SECTION 26 05 53

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON WIRING DEVICES PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 26 27 26 PAGE 1 of 4

SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes wall switches; wall dimmers; receptacles; multioutlet assembly; and device plates and decorative box covers.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:

1. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices. 2. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations.

B. Samples: Submit two samples of each wiring device and wall plate illustrating materials, construction, color, and finish.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years’ experience.

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish two of each style, size, and finish wall plate.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECEPTACLES

A. Manufacturers:

PW1320-A




1. Pass & Seymour or Approved equal.

B. Product Description: Specification grade NEMA WD 1, Heavy-duty general use receptacle.

C. Device Body: Ivory plastic. NEMA WD 6 defines dimensions and standard configurations for receptacles and plugs. Refer to NEMA WD 6, or to manufacturers charts including NEMA configuration references.

D. Configuration: NEMA WD 6.

E. Convenience Receptacle: Type 5-20.

F. GFCI Receptacle: Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit interrupter to meet regulatory requirements.

G. Wiring: Back and side wired. Back wiring with clamp type terminals suitable for stranded or solid wire.

2.2 WALL PLATES

A. Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal plate with hinged and gasketed device cover.

B. Weatherproof Wet Location Cover Plate: Extended polycarbonate hinged cover for use when attachment plug is inserted

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify outlet boxes are installed at proper height.

B. Verify wall openings are neatly cut and completely covered by wall plates.

C. Verify branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean debris from outlet boxes.

PW1320-A




3.3 EXISTING WORK

A. Disconnect and remove abandoned wiring devices.

B. Modify installation to maintain access to existing wiring devices to remain active.

C. Clean and repair existing wiring devices to remain or to be reinstalled.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Install devices plumb and level.

B. Install switches with OFF position down.

C. Install receptacles with grounding pole on top.

D. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

E. Install wall plates on flush mounted switches, receptacles, and blank outlets.

F. Identify switch and receptacle cover plate with panel and branch circuit number, (for example L2A-3), with thermal transfer laminated adhesive tape with 1/8 inch black letters on clear tape cartridge.

G. Connect wiring devices by wrapping solid conductor around screw terminal. Install stranded conductor for branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. When stranded conductors are used in lieu of solid, use crimp on fork terminals for device terminations. Do not place bare stranded conductors directly under device screws.

3.5 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Install convenience receptacle 15 inches to bottom of box above finished floor.


A. Inspect each wiring device for defects.

B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation.

C. Verify each receptacle device is energized.

D. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.

E. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation.

PW1320-A




3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.

END OF SECTION

PW1320-A



CITY OF STOCKTON ENCLOSED SWITCHES PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SECTION 26 28 16 PAGE 1 of 3

SECTION 26 28 16 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Fusible.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:

1. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses. 2. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600

Volts Maximum).

B. International Electrical Testing Association:

1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit switch ratings and enclosure dimensions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCH ASSEMBLIES

A. Manufacturers:

1. EatonElectrical/Culter-Hammer or equal.

B. Description: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, enclosed load interrupter knife switch. Handle lockable in OFF position.

C. Operation:

PW1320-A




1. Switch Ratings

a. Switch Rating: Horsepower rated for AC as indicated on Drawings. b. Short Circuit Current Rating: UL listed for 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes

when used with or protected by Class H or K fuses (30-600 ampere). 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes when used with or protected by Class R or Class J fuses 30-600 ampere switches employing appropriate fuse rejection schemes). 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes when used with or protected by Class L fuses (800-1200 ampere).

D. Materials:

1. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU 1, Class R fuses. 2. Enclosure: NEMA KS 1, to meet conditions. Fabricate enclosure from steel

finished with manufacturer's standard gray enamel. a. Exterior Locations: Type 4.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DEMOLITION

A. Disconnect and remove abandoned enclosed switches.

B. Maintain access to existing enclosed switches and other installations remaining active and requiring access. Modify installation or provide access panel.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install enclosed switches where indicated.

B. Install enclosed switches plumb.

C. Height: 5 feet to operating handle.

D. Install fuses for fusible disconnect switches.

E. Install engraved plastic nameplates. Engrave nameplates with the equipment served and the panel and circuit number supplying the switch.

F. Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and size installed.

PW1320-A





A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean existing enclosed switches to remain or to be reinstalled.

END OF SECTION 26 28 16

PW1320-A